Ricoh MP C307 Field Service Manual
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Ricoh Manuals
  4. Printer
  5. MP C307
  6. Field service manual
Ricoh MP C307 Field Service Manual

Ricoh MP C307 Field Service Manual

Hide thumbs Also See for MP C307:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

Download this manual
MP C307/C407
Machine Code: D296/D297/D298/D299
Field Service Manual
Ver 1.0
Latest Release: Nov, 2017
Initial Release: Nov, 2016
Copyright (c) 2016 Ricoh Co.,Ltd.

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading

Related Manuals for Ricoh MP C307

Summary of Contents for Ricoh MP C307

  • Page 1 MP C307/C407 Machine Code: D296/D297/D298/D299 Field Service Manual Ver 1.0 Latest Release: Nov, 2017 Initial Release: Nov, 2016 Copyright (c) 2016 Ricoh Co.,Ltd.
  • Page 3 Symbols, Abbreviations and Trademarks Symbols and Abbreviations This manual uses several symbols and abbreviations. The meaning of those symbols and abbreviations are as follows: Symbol What it means Clip ring Screw Connector Clamp E-ring Flat Flexible Cable Timing Belt Short Edge Feed Long Edge Feed Black Cyan...
  • Page 4 Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Ricoh Company, Ltd. is under license. Firefox and Thunderbird are registered trademarks of the Mozilla Foundation.
  • Page 5 The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows: • The product names of Windows Vista are as follows: Microsoft® Windows Vista® Ultimate Microsoft® Windows Vista® Business Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Premium Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Basic Microsoft® Windows Vista® Enterprise •...
  • Page 6 Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks. Microsoft product screen shots reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.

  • Page 7: Table Of Contents

    Table of Contents Product Information ............................. 12 Specifications ................................. 12 Machine Configuration ............................13 Main Unit................................13 Controller Options ............................. 14 Machine Overview ..............................16 Overview ................................16 Paper Path ................................17 Drive Layout ..............................18 Installation ................................19 Installation Requirements ............................19 Environment ..............................
  • Page 8 Installation Procedure ............................76 Anti-condensation Heater (Mainframe) ........................ 80 Accessory Check ............................... 80 Installation Procedure ............................81 Anti-condensation Heater (for Mainframe Paper Tray) ..................86 Accessory Check ............................... 86 Installation Procedure ............................87 Anti-condensation Heater (Optional Paper Feed Unit) ..................92 Accessory Check ...............................
  • Page 9 PM/Yield Parts Settings ............................170 Replacement Procedure of the PM/Yield Parts ....................170 After Installing the New PM Parts ........................174 Preparation before Operation Check ....................... 175 Operation Check .............................. 176 Replacement and Adjustment ..........................177 Notes on the Main Power Switch ........................177 Push Switch ..............................
  • Page 10 Top Cover Set Sensor, Original Set Sensor ....................219 ADF Drive Motor ............................219 ADF Feed Clutch............................. 220 ADF Registration Sensor ..........................220 ADF Feed Sensor ............................221 CIS Unit ................................224 Scanner................................. 230 Scanner Unit ..............................230 Scanner Unit with the ADF ..........................231 ADF Set Sensor ...............................
  • Page 11 Development Clutch (K) ..........................268 Drive Unit ................................ 269 Tray Lift Motor ............................... 270 Fusing Motor ..............................271 Paper Transport Motor ............................ 272 Duplex Clutch, Bypass Feed Clutch, Registration Clutch, Paper Feed Clutch ..........273 Fusing................................... 275 Fusing Unit ..............................275 Fusing Upper Cover ............................
  • Page 12 Paper Exit Clutch, Reverse Clutch ........................311 Duplex .................................. 314 Duplex Unit ..............................314 Duplex Entrance Sensor ..........................318 Duplex Exit Sensor ............................319 Right Cover Switch ............................321 Electrical Components ............................322 Electrical Components Overview ........................322 HDD ................................323 Controller Board ..............................
  • Page 13 Overview ................................. 371 Downloading and Updating Process ....................... 372 Checking the ARFU Result ..........................376 Checking the Result Using the Logging Data....................376 Related SP ............................... 376 Updating JavaVM ..............................380 Creating an SD Card for Updating ........................380 Capturing the Device Logs ..........................383 Overview .................................
  • Page 14 SC2xx: Exposure ..............................421 When SC285-00 (MUSIC error) Is Displayed....................425 SC3xx: Image Processing ............................ 428 SC4xx: Image Processing ............................ 433 SC5xx: Paper Feed and Fusing..........................436 SC6xx: Communication ............................450 SC7xx: Peripherals .............................. 462 SC8xx: Overall System ............................463 SC9xx: Others ..............................
  • Page 15 When You Cannot Open the Right Door ......................522 When Fluorescent or LED Lamps Flicker ...................... 524 When Abnormal Noise Occurs ........................525 Detailed Descriptions ............................528 Differences between MP C307/C407 and C306/C406 ..................528 ADF Unit ................................531 Overview ................................. 531 Original Transport Drive ..........................532 Original Set Detection .............................
  • Page 16 Waste Toner Collection Mechanism ....................... 557 Waste Toner Full Detection ..........................557 ITB/ Paper Transfer ............................. 559 Overview ................................. 559 Differences from the Predecessor Models ...................... 559 Transfer Movement and Image Transport ...................... 560 Transfer Bias ..............................561 ITB Contact ..............................562 ITB Cleaning ..............................
  • Page 17 Operation Panel ..............................593 Energy Save ................................. 594 Energy Saver Modes ............................594 Power States of this Machine .......................... 596 Verification of Up Time for each Energy Saving State .................. 598 Checking the Up time by Device State ......................598 Recommendation .............................

  • Page 18: Product Information

    Specifications 1. Product Information Specifications See "Appendices" for the following information: • Specifications • Supported Paper Sizes • Software Accessories • Optional Equipment...

  • Page 19: Machine Configuration

    Machine Configuration Machine Configuration Main Unit • NA = North America, EU = Europe, AA = Asia-Pacific, CHN = China, TWN = Taiwan, KOR = Korea Item Machine Code Remarks New Option? Mainframe D298 MP C307SP for EU/AA D297 MP C307SPF for NA/EU/AA/TWN D299 MP C407SP for AA/CHN/KOR D296...

  • Page 20: Controller Options

    Machine Configuration Controller Options Item Machine Code Remarks Option? Fax Option Type M28 D3E7-02 (EU, Standard: NA, TWN AA,KOR) Option: EU, AA, CHN, KOR D3E7-03 (CHN) Fax Connection Unit D3E7-00 Only for machines equipped with a fax unit. Type M28 Enhanced Security HDD D792-09 (NA, Option Type M10 [2]...
  • Page 21 Machine Configuration Item Machine Code Remarks Option? D3E6-20 (Other) PostScript3 Unit Type D3E6-26 (NA) M28 [4] D3E6-27 (EU) D3E6-28 (Other) OCR Unit Type M13 [4] D3AC-23 (NA) D3AC-24 (EU) D3AC-25 (Other) Data Overwrite Security D3BS-03 Unit Type M19 NFC Card Reader Type D3AC-21...

  • Page 22: Machine Overview

    Machine Overview Machine Overview Overview Callout Item Callout Item Bypass feed tray Scanner unit Paper feed tray Paper exit unit Waste toner bottle Fusing unit ITB unit Duplex unit PCDU Paper transfer roller Toner bottle Registration roller Laser unit...

  • Page 23: Paper Path

    Machine Overview Paper Path Callout Item Callout Item ADF transport path Optional paper feed unit path (1st) 1-Bin tray path Optional paper feed unit path (2nd) Duplex paper transport path Standard paper tray path Bypass paper feed path...

  • Page 24: Drive Layout

    Machine Overview Drive Layout Callout Item Callout Item Scanner motor Paper feed clutch Paper exit clutch Bypass lift clutch Reverse clutch Transport motor Development clutch (K) Bypass feed clutch Drum motor (K) Duplex clutch Drum motor (CMY) Registration clutch Development motor (CMY) Fusing motor Tray lift motor...

  • Page 25: Installation

    Installation Requirements 2. Installation Installation Requirements Environment Temperature Range: 10°C to 32°C (50°F to 89.6°F) Humidity Range: 15% to 80% RH Ambient Illumination: Less than 1500 lux (do not expose to direct sunlight) Ventilation: 3 times/hr/person or more Do not let the machine get exposed to the following: 1) Cool air from an air conditioner 2) Heat from a heater Do not install the machine in areas that are exposed to corrosive gas.

  • Page 26: Machine Space Requirements

    Installation Requirements Machine Space Requirements • This machine, which uses high voltage power sources, can generate ozone gas. High ozone density is harmful to human health. Therefore, the machine must be installed in a well-ventilated room. A: Over 70 mm (2.8") (Base machine) / 120 mm (4.7“) (with 1-Bin tray unit) B: Over 100 mm (3.9") C: Over 402 mm (15.8") D: Over 420 mm (16.5")

  • Page 27: Power Requirements

    Installation Requirements Callout mm (inch) Callout mm (inch) 546.2 mm (approx. 21.5") 210 mm (approx. 8.3") 498 mm (approx. 19.6") 554 mm (approx. 21.8") 425 mm (approx. 16.7") 595 mm (approx. 23.4") 510 mm (approx. 20.1") 510 mm (approx. 20.1") 280 mm (approx.
  • Page 28 Installation Requirements NA: 108 V (120 V-10%) – 138 V (127 V+8.66 %) EU/AA: 198 V (220 V-10%) – 264 V (240 V+10 %) Taiwan: 99 V (110 V -10%) – 121 V (110 V + 10%) Do not put things on the power cord.

  • Page 29: Mainframe Installation

    Mainframe Installation Mainframe Installation Installation Flowchart This flowchart shows the best procedure for installation. Accessory Check For D296/D297 Check the quantity and condition of these accessories.
  • Page 30 Mainframe Installation Component List Description Remark Q’ty NA EU AA TWN NFC Tag To be attached to the device. Decal – Bluetooth Decal – Emblem For the front cover and operation panel Decal – Paper Tray CE Marking Traceability Information Only for EU Ferrite Core Modular Cord with Ferrite Core...
  • Page 31 Manual: Start Guide • An NFC tag is required for connecting this machine to an Android smart device that has the Ricoh Smart Device Connector application installed. Give this NFC tag to the customer so that they can attach it to the machine. Where the tag should be attached and how to set it up for using the smart-device application are described in the help guide within the application.

  • Page 32: Installation Procedure

    Manual: Start Guide • An NFC tag is required for connecting this machine to an Android smart device that has the Ricoh Smart Device Connector application installed. Give this NFC tag to the customer so that they can attach it to the machine. Where the tag should be attached and how to set it up for using the smart-device application are described in the help guide within the application.
  • Page 33 Mainframe Installation • Hold the specified positions as shown below when lifting the machine up or down. Tapes, Retainers and Toner Bottles Remove the tapes and the retainers from the machine. Do the following steps: • Open the ADF cover [A].
  • Page 34 Mainframe Installation • Remove all the tapes and the retainer (protective paper) [B] from the exposure glass. Remove the sheet [A] inside the ADF. Remove the following items: • Paper tray [A] • Retainer [B]...
  • Page 35 Mainframe Installation Open the front door [A]. Pull out all protection seals [A] on the drums straight out towards the front. • Do not remove the orange tape [B] at this time. Remove the waste toner bottle [A].
  • Page 36 Mainframe Installation Remove the orange tape [A] attached to the lever. Set the lever [A] to the upright position. 10. Attach the waste toner bottle. 11. Shake each toner bottle [A] from eight to ten times.
  • Page 37 Mainframe Installation 12. Install each toner bottle [A] in the machine. 13. Close the front door. 14. Connect the power cord to the machine. 15. Attach the paper tray. 16. Connect the network cable, if the client IP addresses are automatically provided through a system such as DHCP in the network settings.
  • Page 38 Mainframe Installation is no need to set the password. On the Program/Change Administrator screen, press [Change] next to Supervisor and then touch [OK] without entering any password. Touch [OK] again when the Confirm password display appears. For Administrator 1, do the same procedure as steps 1 and 2. Press [OK], then the home display appears.
  • Page 39 Mainframe Installation Enter a password. Press [OK]. Confirm the Password.
  • Page 40 Mainframe Installation Press [OK]. Change the Administrator 1 login password. Enter the password.
  • Page 41 Mainframe Installation 10. Press [OK]. 11. Confirm the password. 12. Press [OK]. 13. If necessary, set “Admin. Authentication” ON. [User Tools] -> [Machine Features] -> [System Settings] -> [Administrator Tools] -> [Administrator Authentication Management] -> [Admin. Authentication] If this setting is OFF, [Login] for administrators is not displayed on the operation panel. 14.
  • Page 42 Mainframe Installation Checking the Image Quality Checking Paper Setting Do the following procedure after installing all the options. Check that all tapes are removed. Then connect the power plug into the wall socket. Pull out the paper feed tray [A] until it stops. Release the side fence.
  • Page 43 Mainframe Installation Press [Maintenance]. Press [Auto Color Calibration] Press [Start] for the Copier function. Press [Start Printing]. Take the sheet that was just printed, and put it on the exposure glass. Press [Start Scanning]. Do the same procedure for the Printer function. •...
  • Page 44 Mainframe Installation (1) Enable ARFU Set SP5-886-111 (Auto Update Setting) to "1 (ON)". 1: ON / 0: OFF (Default) To download the firmware only using SFU (Smart Firmware Update), and not by ARFU, specify the settings as follows: - SP5-886-111(Auto Update Setting) to "0 (OFF)" - SP5-886-115 (SFU Auto Download Setting) to "1 (ON)"...
  • Page 45 Mainframe Installation • SP5-886-114 (Auto Update Prohibit End hour) Default: 17 • SP5-886-120 (Auto Update Prohibit Day Of Week Setting) Default: 00000000 [00H] Set the bits for the days of the week to prohibit updating. Prohibited (Monday - Sunday): bit 7, Monday: bit 6, Tuesday: bit 5 Wednesday: bit 4, Thursday: bit 3, Friday: bit 2, Saturday: bit 1, Sunday: bit 0 e.g.) Prohibited on Mon., Fri., Sat., and Sun.: 01000111 [47H] They can be specified also via Web Image Monitor if logged in as the machine administrator from the device if...
  • Page 46 Mainframe Installation 4-2. IPv4 address of the DNS server Check the DNS IPv4 address and check the connection. (In User Tools > Machine Features > System Settings > Interface Settings > DNS configuration) How to find the IP address: Ask the customer to tell you the IP address of the DNS server. If the customer does not know it, ask the customer to check the IP address by one of the following ways: 1.
  • Page 47 If access to the external server is restricted, request the network administrator (customer) to permit the following FQDN name for communication.- FQDN: p-rfu-ds2.support.ricoh.com They can be specified also via Web Image Monitor if logged in as the machine administrator from the device if SP5-886-111(Auto Update Setting) is set to "1(ON)".
  • Page 48 RC Gate Type BN1 does not support 2048 bit encryption level communication with Ricoh devices (HTTPS Managed device). Therefore, the device cannot be registered under RC Gate Type BN 1. 2) Ricoh device (HTTPS Managed) that supports only 512 bit encryption level is registered as an external appliance.

  • Page 49: Language Selection

    Mainframe Installation Click "Auto Firmware Update". Turn the main power OFF and back ON again after setting SP5-886-111 (AutoUpdateSetting) to "1 (ON)". "Auto Firmware Update" will appear in the menu list of Web Image Monitor. Specify the times and days of the week to prohibit updating. Select the check boxes of the applicable days of the week to prohibit updating on that day Language Selection Press [User Tools] on the operation panel.

  • Page 50: Brand Plate, Decals

    Mainframe Installation Press [Screen Features]. Press [Language & Input]. Press [Change Language]. The machine shows the preset language list. • If the language you want is listed, press the language, and then go to Step 9. • If the required language is not in the list, go to the next step. Press [Select Switchable Language] and select the language you want.

  • Page 51: Settings Relevant To The Service Contract

    Mainframe Installation 3. Open the front cover. 4. Remove the inner cover [A] ( × 1) and then store the decal in the area [B]. Settings Relevant to the Service Contract Change the necessary settings for the following SP modes if the customer has made a service contract. •...
  • Page 52 Mainframe Installation through 004 the counter list when the meter charge mode is selected. This lets the user fax the counter data to the service station. Settings for @Remote Service • Prepare and check the following check points before you visit the customer site. For details, ask the @Remote key person.
  • Page 53 Mainframe Installation Value Meaning Solution/ Workaround Already registered Parameter error Dial-up authentication error * These errors occur only in the modems that support @Remote. Answer tone detection error Carrier detection error Invalid setting value (modem) Low power supply current unplugged modem Busy line Make sure that the screen displays the Location Information with SP5-816-205 only when it has been input at the Center GUI.

  • Page 54: Transporting The Machine

    Mainframe Installation Code Meaning Solution/ Workaround -12002 Inquiry, registration attempted without acquiring Request Obtain a Request Number before attempting the Inquiry or Registration. -12003 Attempted registration without execution of a Perform Confirmation before attempting the confirmation and no previous registration. Registration.
  • Page 55 Mainframe Installation If there is already a machine with one or more optional paper feed unit(s), be sure to disconnect the machine and paper feed unit(s), and lift them up separately when moving/transporting. Otherwise, the handle of the paper feed unit will break due to the machine’s weight, and it can cause an injury. The following should be done before transporting the machine.

  • Page 56: Instructions For The Customers

    Mainframe Installation • Hold the specified positions as shown below when lifting the machine up or down. Instructions for the Customers The following items should be advised when the machine is installed. These items are explained in more detail in the operating instructions. •...

  • Page 57: Security Setting

    Security Setting Security Setting Security Function Installation • If the “Enhanced Security HDD Option Type M10” is installed at the same time as the main machine’s installation, do not execute these settings described below. When the “Enhanced Security HDD Option Type M10” and security functions (Data Overwrite Security and HDD Encryption Unit) are activated in the same machine, the function of the “Enhanced Security HDD Option”...

  • Page 58: Data Overwrite Security

    Security Setting • "NVRAM" or EEPROM on the BCU has nothing to do with this. Please use the following procedures when the Data Overwrite Security and HDD Encryption must be reinstalled. Data Overwrite Security Before You Begin the Procedure Make sure that the following settings (1) to (3) are not at their factory default values. (1) Supervisor login password (2) Administrator login name (3) Administrator login password...
  • Page 59 Security Setting Press [Auto Erase Memory Setting]. Press [On]. Select the method of overwriting. If you select [NSA] or [DoD], proceed to step 10. If you select [Random Numbers], proceed to step 12. 10. Press [Change]. 11. Enter the number of times that you want to overwrite using the number keys, and then press [#]. 12.

  • Page 60: Hdd Encryption

    Security Setting HDD Encryption Before You Begin the Procedure Make sure that the following settings (1) to (3) are not at the factory default settings. (1) Supervisor login password (2) Administrator login name (3) Administrator login password If any of these settings is at a factory default value, tell the customer these settings must be changed before you do the installation procedure.
  • Page 61 Security Setting Press [Machine Data Encryption Settings]. Press [Encrypt]. 10. Select the data to be carried over to the HDD and not be reset. To carry all of the data over to the HDD, select [All Data]. To carry over only the machine settings data, select [File System Data Only]. To reset all of the data, select [Format All Data].
  • Page 62 Security Setting Press [User Tools]. Press [Machine Features]. Press [System Settings]. Press [Administrator Tools]. Press [Machine Data Encryption Settings]. Confirm whether the encryption has been completed or not on this display. Backing Up the Encryption Key The encryption key can be backed up. Select whether to save it to an SD card or to print it. •...
  • Page 63 Security Setting Select the backup method. If you have selected [Save to SD Card], load an SD card into the media slot on the side of the control panel and press [OK]. After the machine's data encryption key is backed up, press [Exit]. If you have selected [Print on Paper], press the [Start] key.
  • Page 64 Security Setting If the encryption key back-up has been lost, follow the procedure below to do a forced start-up. • The HDD will be formatted after the forced start-up. • Encrypted data will be deleted. • User settings will be cleared. Prepare an SD card.

  • Page 65: Paper Feed Unit Pb1080 (D573-57), Paper Feed Unit Pb1080Te (D573-13)

    Paper Feed Unit PB1080 (D573-57), Paper Feed Unit PB1080TE (D573-13) Paper Feed Unit PB1080 (D573-57), Paper Feed Unit PB1080TE (D573-13) Paper Feed Unit PB1080TE is only for NA. Accessory Check Confirm that you have the accessories listed below. Description Q’ty EMC Address Name Plate Decal Size Indication...

  • Page 66: Installation Procedure

    Paper Feed Unit PB1080 (D573-57), Paper Feed Unit PB1080TE (D573-13) Enable Secure Tray Mode. User Tools > System Settings > Tray Paper Settings> Secure Tray Mode> Tray2 or Tray3 Installation Procedure • Turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from the wall socket. If installing without turning OFF the main power, an electric shock or a malfunction may occur.
  • Page 67 Paper Feed Unit PB1080 (D573-57), Paper Feed Unit PB1080TE (D573-13) • Be sure to hold the following positions when lifting the mainframe. Remove the tapes and the paper (EMC address) on the paper feed unit. Set the copier on the paper feed unit. •...
  • Page 68 Paper Feed Unit PB1080 (D573-57), Paper Feed Unit PB1080TE (D573-13) Attach the appropriate paper tray number decal [A] and paper size decal [B] above and below the line [C] on each tray of the paper feed unit. Load paper into the paper tray(s) and set the side fences and end fence(s). Adjust the registration for each tray (Image Adjustment).

  • Page 69: 1-Bin Tray Bn1030 (D574-58)

    1-Bin Tray BN1030 (D574-58) 1-Bin Tray BN1030 (D574-58) Accessory Check Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list. Description Q’ty 1-Bin Tray Unit Tray Binding Screw (M3×6) Screw (M3×10) Grounding Plate Front Right Cover Left Upper Cover Right Upper Cover Rear Upper Cover Mounting Frame...

  • Page 70: Installation Procedure

    1-Bin Tray BN1030 (D574-58) Installation Procedure • Turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from the wall socket. If installing without turning OFF the main power, an electric shock or a malfunction may occur. Remove the ADF and scanner unit Remove the left upper cover [A] ( ×...
  • Page 71 1-Bin Tray BN1030 (D574-58) Remove the front right cover [A] and the hinge cover [B]. Remove the scanner rear cover [A] and scanner rear small cover [B]. Release two screws and three tabs for attaching the relay board [A] and FFC, to release the FFC.
  • Page 72 1-Bin Tray BN1030 (D574-58) Remove the FFC fixing bracket [A] on the back side of the FFC. Remove the FFC fixing bracket while turning it counterclockwise and releasing the tab. Release the clamp for fixing the I/F cable [A].
  • Page 73 1-Bin Tray BN1030 (D574-58) Remove the grounding plate [A]. 10. Disconnect the FFC [A] from the relay board. Disconnect the FFC for the relay board while pulling it out straight, because it does not have a lock mechanism. 11. Remove the harnesses and FFC from the scanner unit on the BiCU [A]. When lifting the scanner unit, move the harnesses out of the frame so that they do not interfere.
  • Page 74 1-Bin Tray BN1030 (D574-58) 12. Remove the screws, and then remove the scanner unit [B] with the ADF [A]. Install the 1-bin Tray Unit Remove the orange tapes on the 1-bin tray unit. Remove the two clamps of the USB cable [A] of the control panel, bundle the excessive cable, and fasten with the clamps again.
  • Page 75 1-Bin Tray BN1030 (D574-58) Attach the mounting frame [A]. (M3×10: × 8) • Install the screws in this order: Route the USB cable [A] on the mounting frame and fasten with the two clamps. Attach the 1-bin tray unit [A]. (M3x10: 4 screw, and blue screw [D]) Fasten the grounding wire [B] included in this kit with one screw as shown below.
  • Page 76 1-Bin Tray BN1030 (D574-58) Connect the connector of the 1-bin tray unit to CN527 on the BiCU, and then fasten the harness [A]. Route the harness with the hook (marked by the dashed circle). Install the 1-bin tray [A].
  • Page 77 1-Bin Tray BN1030 (D574-58) Install the scanner unit [A] with the ADF. When installing the scanner unit, make sure that the harnesses are not pinched between the scanner unit and the 1-bin tray unit (marked by the dashed circle).
  • Page 78 1-Bin Tray BN1030 (D574-58) 10. Attach the grounding plate [A] and clamp the harness [B] to the ADF. (Upper: blue screw ×1, Lower: M3x10 (existing)) 11. Connect the relay board [A] and FFC [B]. Turn over twice to spread the FFC that was folded, and connect it. Connect the FFC by pushing it straight, because it does not have a lock mechanism.
  • Page 79 1-Bin Tray BN1030 (D574-58) 14. Attach the FFC with the screw [C]. 15. Set two ferrite cores [B] in the ferrite core holder [A] included in this kit. 16. Route the FFC of the scanner unit through the two ferrite cores in step 15. Align the ferrite core holder [A] with the reference ribs on the back of the unit, and attach it with double-sided tape.
  • Page 80 1-Bin Tray BN1030 (D574-58) • The FFC should be routed under the USB cable. • Do not connect the FFC at an angle. Otherwise, the scanner unit may be damaged. • Connect the scanner FFC for the BiCU while pressing the lock release button. 19.
  • Page 81 1-Bin Tray BN1030 (D574-58) 21. Attach the following items: • Scanner rear small cover • Scanner rear cover • Right rear cover • Rear cover 22. Turn ON the main power and check the 1-bin tray unit operation.

  • Page 82: Optional Counter Interface Unit Type M12 (B870-21)

    Optional Counter Interface Unit Type M12 (B870-21) Optional Counter Interface Unit Type M12 (B870-21) Accessory Check Description Q’ty Counter interface board Harness Stud Clamp Harness band Screws (Not used) Screws (Not used) Caution Chart Installation Procedure • Turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from the wall socket. If installing without turning OFF the main power, an electric shock or a malfunction may occur.
  • Page 83 Optional Counter Interface Unit Type M12 (B870-21) Install the four studs [A] in the controller box. Install the key counter interface board [A] shown below on the four studs. Connect the harness included in this kit to the connector [A] on the interface board. Do the following steps: •...
  • Page 84 Optional Counter Interface Unit Type M12 (B870-21) • Insert the clamp included in this kit at [C], and clamp the harness with the clamp to prevent interference with other harnesses. Remove the scanner rear cover [A]. Cut out the hole for the counter device cable to pass through the scanner rear cover [A]. Reattach the scanner rear cover.
  • Page 85 Optional Counter Interface Unit Type M12 (B870-21) 10. Route the harness through the scanner rear cover [B] as shown below. 11. Reassemble the machine.

  • Page 86: Anti-Condensation Heater (Mainframe)

    Anti-condensation Heater (Mainframe) Anti-condensation Heater (Mainframe) Accessory Check All the accessories required to install the anti-condensation heater for mainframe are available as the following parts. Order these separately from the heater. • These part numbers are correct as of November, 2016. Refer to the “Option” section in the mainframe’s parts catalog to check the latest part numbers.

  • Page 87: Installation Procedure

    Anti-condensation Heater (Mainframe) Installation Procedure • Do not lift the machine together with one or more paper feed unit(s): If there is already a machine with one or more optional paper feed unit(s), be sure to disconnect the machine and paper feed unit(s), and lift them up separately when moving/transporting. Otherwise, the handle of the paper feed unit will break due to the mainframe’s weight, and it can cause an injury.
  • Page 88 Anti-condensation Heater (Mainframe) Junction harness connections: A: To the heater B: To the power switch C: To the optional PFU heater (if installed) D: To the PSU Do the following steps: • Remove the cover [E], and then pull out the heater harness [F]. •...
  • Page 89 Anti-condensation Heater (Mainframe) Store the connector [A] in the connector holder, then push the power switch [B] into the switch hole until you feel it click into place. Cut out the switch hole [B] in the switch cover, and then attach the cover [A]. (Hooks × 2) Route the junction harness as shown below.
  • Page 90 Anti-condensation Heater (Mainframe) • Connect the connector [A] to CN600. • Attach the clamp and route the harness. ( × 1) • Only when the heater for optional paper feed tray will not be installed, store the connector [B] in the holder.
  • Page 91 Anti-condensation Heater (Mainframe) When the optional PFU tray heater will be installed: Pull out the connector [A] and its harness to the lower part of the machine. Then uncap the connector isolation cap in the optional PFU and connect the connector [A] to the uncapped connector.

  • Page 92: Anti-Condensation Heater (For Mainframe Paper Tray)

    Anti-condensation Heater (for Mainframe Paper Tray) Anti-condensation Heater (for Mainframe Paper Tray) Accessory Check Items Q’ty Remarks See Note *2 Screw M4 x 6 A: Heater Kit Harness Heater Harness B: Harness Clamps A: Heater Kit Bracket C: Bracket Set Bracket Bracket Locating pin (Long)

  • Page 93: Installation Procedure

    Anti-condensation Heater (for Mainframe Paper Tray) Installation Procedure • Do not lift the machine together with one or more paper feed unit(s): If there is already a machine with one or more optional paper feed unit(s), be sure to disconnect the machine and paper feed unit(s), and lift them up separately when moving/transporting.
  • Page 94 Anti-condensation Heater (for Mainframe Paper Tray) Connect the heater harness [A] to the anti-condensation heater and route it as shown below. ( × 1, × • A: For the anti-condensation heater • B: For the junction harness • C: For the isolation cap (Not used) •...
  • Page 95 Anti-condensation Heater (for Mainframe Paper Tray) Remove the PSU fan. (PSU Fan) Connect the connector to CN600 on the PSU and route the junction harness along the red dotted line in the photo. ( × 1) • A: Not used (For the drum heater: If installing the anti-condensation heater for the mainframe) •...
  • Page 96 Anti-condensation Heater (for Mainframe Paper Tray) • Store the connector [B] into the cover [E], and then attach the cover [E]. Install the PSU fan. 10. Connect the junction harness [A] to the heater harness and route the junction harness along the red dotted line in the photo.
  • Page 97 Anti-condensation Heater (for Mainframe Paper Tray) 13. Attach the securing bracket [A] at the left of the machine. ( × 2) 14. Reattach the left cover.

  • Page 98: Anti-Condensation Heater (Optional Paper Feed Unit)

    Anti-condensation Heater (Optional Paper Feed Unit) Anti-condensation Heater (Optional Paper Feed Unit) Accessory Check Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list. Other components included in this kit are not used for installation on this machine. •...
  • Page 99 Anti-condensation Heater (Optional Paper Feed Unit) For Joining the Mainframe and Another Paper Feed Unit: Description Q’ty Joint bracket (Front left) Joint bracket (Front right) Joint bracket (Front center) (only for the optional paper feed unit) Joint bracket (Rear) Joint bracket (Frame) (only for optional paper feed unit) M3 x 6: Screw M3 x 12: Screw Tapping screw...

  • Page 100: Installation Procedure

    Anti-condensation Heater (Optional Paper Feed Unit) Installation Procedure • Turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from the wall socket. If installing without turning OFF the main power, an electric shock or a malfunction may occur. • Do the following procedure not to damage any harnesses.
  • Page 101 Anti-condensation Heater (Optional Paper Feed Unit) For Installing the Tray Heater on the 1st Paper Feed Unit Pull out the tray [A] in the optional paper tray. Remove the rear cover [A] ( x 2) Remove the left cover. (Left Cover)
  • Page 102 Anti-condensation Heater (Optional Paper Feed Unit) Slide in the tray heater [A], and pass the heater harness [B] through the square hole [C]. Install the tray heater [A] in the paper feed unit. ( × 2) Do the following steps: •...
  • Page 103 Anti-condensation Heater (Optional Paper Feed Unit) • A: For this tray heater • B: For the mainframe • C: For another optional tray heater • D: Isolation cap (uncap if installing the heater for 2nd paper tray) * For connection with the mainframe, see the installation procedure for the mainframe tray heater (See p.80).
  • Page 104 Anti-condensation Heater (Optional Paper Feed Unit) • A: To the 2nd tray heater • B: To the 1st tray heater harness • C: Not used • D: Cap Reattach all the covers removed. For Joining the Mainframe with the Optional Paper Feed Unit The mainframe and the optional paper feed unit should be joined with joint brackets after the anti-condensation heater installation, because the heater harness may be damaged when the mainframe is removed accidentally.
  • Page 105 Anti-condensation Heater (Optional Paper Feed Unit) Remove the upper cover [A] of the paper feed unit. ( × 3) Remove the rear cover [A] of the paper feed unit. ( × 2)
  • Page 106 Anti-condensation Heater (Optional Paper Feed Unit) Attach the joint bracket (frame) [C] ( :Tapping × 1 [A], M3×6: × 1 [B]) and the upper cover of the paper feed unit. ( × 3) Put the mainframe on the paper feed unit. Do the following steps.
  • Page 107 Anti-condensation Heater (Optional Paper Feed Unit) 1: Rear 2: Front 3: Left Join the mainframe with the optional paper feed unit with four joint brackets [A] (front right), [B] (front left) and [C] (rear) (×2). These brackets are secured with the following screws. 1: Front right 2: Left 3: Rear...
  • Page 108 Anti-condensation Heater (Optional Paper Feed Unit) Joining Two Optional Paper Feed Units Attach the joint bracket (front center) [A] to the paper feed unit that will be installed at the lowest position. :Tapping × 2 (included in this kit)) Put the optional paper feed unit on the paper feed unit that was fitted with the bracket [A] in step 1. Remove the paper trays.
  • Page 109 Anti-condensation Heater (Optional Paper Feed Unit) Join the two paper feed units with two joint brackets (rear) [A] and one screw [B]. (M3×6: × 3 (included in this kit)) 1: Rear 2: Front center Reassemble the mainframe and the paper feed units. •...

  • Page 110: Enhanced Security Hdd Option Type M10 (D792-09)

    Enhanced Security HDD Option Type M10 (D792-09) Enhanced Security HDD Option Type M10 (D792-09) Accessory Check Description Q’ty Enhanced Security HDD EMC Address Installation Procedure • Turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from the wall socket. If installing without turning OFF the main power, an electric shock or a malfunction may occur.
  • Page 111 Enhanced Security HDD Option Type M10 (D792-09) Disconnect the cables from the standard HDD. ( × 2) Remove the enhanced security HDD from its protective pack. Connect the two cables to the enhanced security HDD. ( × 2)
  • Page 112 Enhanced Security HDD Option Type M10 (D792-09) Fasten the HDD to the bracket. ( × 4) Install the HDD bracket in the mainframe. ( × 3, × 2) Reassemble the machine. After Installing the HDD Connect the power cord and turn the machine on. A message prompts you to format the hard disk. Touch [Format].
  • Page 113 Enhanced Security HDD Option Type M10 (D792-09) Cycle the machine off/on after the message tells you formatting is finished. Ask an administrator to register an HDD authentication code in the machine. • If the HDD Authentication Code is not registered, the function of the enhanced security HDD is not activated.

  • Page 114: Ic Card Reader (External Option)

    IC Card Reader (External Option) IC Card Reader (External Option) Accessory Check Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list. Description Q'ty IC Card Reader Bracket* Screw *The IC card reader attaching bracket has two types. One is for the base machine. The other is for machines that have the 1-Bin Tray Unit.
  • Page 115 IC Card Reader (External Option) Attach the IC card reader [A] to the rear of the front right cover [B] with the bracket [C]. ( × 1 included in this kit) Route the USB cable [A] from the IC card reader as shown below, and then pull out the USB cable from the rear of the machine.
  • Page 116 IC Card Reader (External Option) • Connect the USB cable to the USB connector at the left of the mainframe as shown below. Either connector can be used. • Obtain these clamps [A] in advance, because they are not included in this kit. When Installing in a Machine That Has a 1-Bin Tray Unit Remove the following items.
  • Page 117 IC Card Reader (External Option) Attach the IC card reader [A] to the rear of the front right cover [B] with the bracket [C]. ( × 1 included in this kit) • The bracket [C] is different from that of the base machine. The bracket for the base machine cannot be used.
  • Page 118 IC Card Reader (External Option) Cut out the hole for the USB cable to pass through the scanner rear cover [A]. Pass the USB cable from the IC card reader through the hole in the scanner rear cover, and then reassemble the machine.

  • Page 119: Nfc Card Reader Type M13 (D3Ac-21)

    NFC Card Reader Type M13 (D3AC-21) NFC Card Reader Type M13 (D3AC-21) Accessory Check Description Q'ty Cable Cover (P/N: D3AC1420) Cable Cover: 1BIN (P/N: D3AC1421) USB Cable NFC Reader Ferrite Core Caution Chart EMC Address Fastener Decal Label  Two types of cable cover are included: [A]: For a machine that has no 1-Bin tray unit.

  • Page 120: Installation Procedure

    NFC Card Reader Type M13 (D3AC-21) Installation Procedure This section includes the procedure for a machine that has no 1-Bin Tray Unit option. However, this procedure can be used for a machine that has a 1-Bin Tray Unit installed. • Turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from the wall socket.
  • Page 121 NFC Card Reader Type M13 (D3AC-21) Make a loop with the USB cable of the NFC reader, and then attach the ferrite core [A]. Connect the USB cable to the operation panel. Attach the cover removed in step 3. • Fit the cable into the slit [A] in the cover.
  • Page 122 NFC Card Reader Type M13 (D3AC-21) Attach the hinge cover [A]. • Fit the cable into the slit. Attach the fasteners to the front side of the NFC reader [A]. Attach the NFC reader [A] to the back side of the front right cover with adhesive tape.
  • Page 123 NFC Card Reader Type M13 (D3AC-21) • Make sure that the cable fits in the slit [B]. 10. Reattach the front right cover with the NFC reader. 11. Push the USB cable into the covers. • Again, make sure that the cable fits in the slit. 12.

  • Page 124: Page Keeper Type M28 (D3Dq-17)

    Page Keeper Type M28 (D3DQ-17) Page Keeper Type M28 (D3DQ-17) This option is only for NA/EU. Accessory Check Description Q’ty Remark Double-feed sensor: Receiver Ground plate: Receiver Double-feed sensor: Emitter Ground plate: Emitter Tapping Screws: 3x10 Screw: M3x6 Harness: Receiver Long harness Harness: Emitter Short harness...
  • Page 125 Page Keeper Type M28 (D3DQ-17) Remove the screw, and lift up the original tray [B]. Open the ADF [A], and release the five tabs of the ADF rear cover by using a thin screwdriver. Remove the ADF rear cover [A]. Close the ADF.
  • Page 126 Page Keeper Type M28 (D3DQ-17) Removing the ADF front cover Open the ADF top cover [A]. Remove the screw, and lift up the original tray [B]. Open the ADF, then release the three tabs of the ADF front cover [A]. Close the ADF slightly, then remove the ADF front cover [A] while releasing the two tabs with a thin screwdriver.
  • Page 127 Page Keeper Type M28 (D3DQ-17) Installing the double-feed sensor (emitter) Slide the shaft [A] of the original feed unit toward the rear to remove it. Remove the ADF inner cover [A]. • Lift the back of the ADF inner cover [A] while swinging up the original tray [B], and then slide the ADF inner cover toward the back of the ADF unit.
  • Page 128 Page Keeper Type M28 (D3DQ-17) Remove the guard [A]. Put the grounding plate [A] on the double-feed sensor (emitter) [B]. Attach the double-feed sensor (emitter) [A] and grounding plate [B] as a set. (Tapping screw: 3x10)
  • Page 129 Page Keeper Type M28 (D3DQ-17) Installing the double-feed sensor (receiver) Disconnect the harness [A] of the ADF top cover [B] from ADF relay board (CN5), and release the clamp. Remove the harness [A] from the harness guide. Remove the ADF top cover [A].
  • Page 130 Page Keeper Type M28 (D3DQ-17) Remove the five screws and release the four tabs, and then remove the inner cover [A]. Attach the grounding plate [A] and the grounding wire [B], and insert the grounding wire in the notch. (Tapping Screw: 3x10) Connect the long harness to the double-feed sensor (receiver) [A].
  • Page 131 Page Keeper Type M28 (D3DQ-17) Route the harnesses [B]. Reattach the inner cover ( x5), and then reattach the ADF top cover ( x1). • Make sure the ADF top cover is set correctly so that the two tabs fit into the holes. 10.
  • Page 132 Page Keeper Type M28 (D3DQ-17) - ADF relay board: Black connector Connect the harnesses [A] from the ADF top cover to the connectors of the ADF relay board [B] (CN5, CN6). Reattach the covers and original feed unit. When reattaching the ADF inner cover, make sure that the shaft [A] fits into the groove (this is the shaft of the lock lever for the friction pad on the back side of the cover).
  • Page 133 Page Keeper Type M28 (D3DQ-17) After installing the double-feed sensor Connect the power cord and turn ON the main power. Enter the SP mode. Set the SP6-040-001 (Page Keeper: Mount Select) to “1(ON)”. Press [END] twice. Turn the main power OFF and ON. Login as Administrator.

  • Page 134: Controller Options

    Controller Options Controller Options Overview • Always touch a grounded surface to discharge static electricity from your hands before you handle SD cards, printed circuit boards, or memory boards. This machine has I/F card slots for optional I/F connections and SD card slots applications. After you install an option, check that the machine can recognize it (See Check All Connections at the end of...
  • Page 135 Controller Options from one card to another card. • Do not use the SD card if it has been used before for other purposes. Normal operation is not guaranteed when such an SD card is used. • The original application SD card should be stored using the following procedure. Remove the paper tray.
  • Page 136 Controller Options Remove the cover [A]. ( × 1, hook × 1) Insert the SD card into either socket [A] or [B]. • The place [C] on the cover is for storing the SMC list. Reassemble the machine. • The original application SD card should be kept in a safe place, for the following reasons:...
  • Page 137 Controller Options • The SD card can be the only proof that the user is licensed to use the application program. • You may need to check the SD card and its data to solve a problem in the future. Move Exec "Move Exec"...

  • Page 138: Accessory Check

    Controller Options • Do not turn ON the write protect switch of the system SD card or application SD card on the machine. If the write protect switch is ON, a download error (e.g. Error Code 44) occurs during a firmware upgrade or application merge.
  • Page 139 Controller Options To address the possible customer needs listed below, the PostScript3 is made available as an option. • When you want to use device fonts supplied with Adobe PS. • Since forms and ledgers have been created based on device fonts supplied with Adobe PS, a changeover to Clone PS requires redesign of these documents.
  • Page 140 Controller Options Reattach the SD card slot cover (coin screw x 1). Stick the "Adobe PostScript3" decal [A] on the front face of the machine. Turn ON the main power. Print out the "Configuration Page", and then check if this option is correctly recognized. •...
  • Page 141 Controller Options • Setting items (Mac OS X): If the driver is installed by means of the Bonjour function or “HP Jetdirect - Socket”, the settings will be automatically configured. Automatic configuration will not work if any other protocol is used for installation. In this case, manual configuration is required.

  • Page 142: Adobe Ps Vs. Clone Ps

    Controller Options Adobe PS vs. Clone PS Overview This machine is equipped with a clone program for emulating Adobe PostScript/PDF (hereafter “Clone PS”) as a standard feature. So, by default, it can perform printing using PostScript 3 and PDF Direct Print, in addition to RPCS.
  • Page 143 Controller Options • Configuration Page The description of the Firmware Version listed on the page varies as shown below: PS type Description of Firmware Version Adobe PS RPCS [x.xx.xx] Adobe PostScript 3 [x.xx], Adobe PDF [x.xx] Clone PS RPCS [x.xx.xx] PS3 [x.xx], PDF [x.xx] The manufacturers name “Adobe”...
  • Page 144 Controller Options • Operation Panel: Firmware Version User Tools > Machine Features > System Settings > Administrator Tools > Firmware Version When PostScript3 Unit Option (Adobe PS) is installed: Clone PS only: Module Name Description PDF (1st page) The Clone firmware number appears. PDF (2nd page) The Adobe firmware number appears.
  • Page 145 Controller Options • Font Change Confirmation screen The “Font Change Confirmation” screen is accessible only when Clone PS is used. On the Home screen, select the User Tools icon > Machine Features > Printer Features > PS Menu > Font Change Confirmation.
  • Page 146 Controller Options PS type LetterGothic Clone When LetterGothic is originally used, Clone PS substitutes it with LetterGothic-Regular. In this case, the character spacing differs from that in the original data. Example 3 PS type Chicago Adobe Clone Clone PS does not support alternative fonts for Chicago; instead, the Courier font (*) is used. (The font shape differs significantly from Chicago.) * Since Courier itself is named among the Adobe PS device fonts, Clone PS substitutes it with an alternative font, NimbusMonoPS-Regular.
  • Page 147 Controller Options • User Tools icon on Home screen > Machine Features > Printer Features > PS Menu > Font Change Confirmation List of fonts and their replacements (Adobe PS -> Clone PS) Adobe PS Clone PS Courier NimbusMonoPS-Regular Courier-Bold NimbusMonoPS-Bold Courier-BoldOblique NimbusMonoPS-BoldItalic...
  • Page 148 Controller Options Adobe PS Clone PS AvantGarde-Demi URWGothic-Demi AvantGarde-DemiOblique URWGothic-DemiOblique Bodoni NimbusMonoPS-Regular Bodoni-Italic NimbusMonoPS-Regular Bodoni-Bold NimbusMonoPS-Regular Bodoni-BoldItalic NimbusMonoPS-Regular Bodoni-Poster NimbusMonoPS-Regular Bodoni-PosterCompressed NimbusMonoPS-Regular Bookman-Light URWBookman-Light Bookman-LightItalic URWBookman-LightItalic Bookman-Demi URWBookman-Demi Bookman-DemiItalic URWBookman-DemiItalic Carta NimbusMonoPS-Regular Chicago NimbusMonoPS-Regular Clarendon NimbusMonoPS-Regular Clarendon-Light NimbusMonoPS-Regular Clarendon-Bold NimbusMonoPS-Regular CooperBlack NimbusMonoPS-Regular CooperBlack-Italic...
  • Page 149 Controller Options Adobe PS Clone PS Goudy-Italic NimbusMonoPS-Regular Goudy-Bold NimbusMonoPS-Regular Goudy-BoldItalic NimbusMonoPS-Regular Goudy-ExtraBold NimbusMonoPS-Regular Helvetica-Condensed NimbusMonoPS-Regular Helvetica-Condensed-Oblique NimbusMonoPS-Regular Helvetica-Condensed-Bold NimbusMonoPS-Regular Helvetica-Condensed-BoldObl NimbusMonoPS-Regular Helvetica-Narrow NimbusSansNarrow-Regular Helvetica-Narrow-Oblique NimbusSansNarrow-Oblique Helvetica-Narrow-Bold NimbusSansNarrow-Bold Helvetica-Narrow-BoldOblique NimbusSansNarrow-BoldOblique HoeflerText-Regular NimbusMonoPS-Regular HoeflerText-Italic NimbusMonoPS-Regular HoeflerText-Black NimbusMonoPS-Regular HoeflerText-BlackItalic NimbusMonoPS-Regular HoeflerText-Ornaments NimbusMonoPS-Regular JoannaMT NimbusMonoPS-Regular JoannaMT-Italic...
  • Page 150 Controller Options Adobe PS Clone PS Optima NimbusMonoPS-Regular Optima-Italic NimbusMonoPS-Regular Optima-Bold NimbusMonoPS-Regular Optima-BoldItalic NimbusMonoPS-Regular Oxford NimbusMonoPS-Regular Palatino-Roman Palladio-Roman Palatino-Italic Palladio-Italic Palatino-Bold Palladio-Bold Palatino-BoldItalic Palladio-BoldItalic StempelGaramond-Roman NimbusMonoPS-Regular StempelGaramond-Italic NimbusMonoPS-Regular StempelGaramond-Bold NimbusMonoPS-Regular StempelGaramond-BoldItalic NimbusMonoPS-Regular Tekton NimbusMonoPS-Regular TimesNewRomanPSMT NimbusRomanNo9-Regular TimesNewRomanPS-ItalicMT NimbusRomanNo9-Italic TimesNewRomanPS-BoldMT NimbusRomanNo9-Bold TimesNewRomanPS-BoldItalicMT NimbusRomanNo9-BoldItalic Univers...
  • Page 151 Controller Options Differences in Driver Functions As shown below, there are differences in available driver functions between Adobe PS and Clone PS. Font Substitution Table (Applicable only to driver for Windows OS) Start > Device and Printer > Printer Properties > Device Settings For Clone PS, the Font Substitution Table under the Device Settings menu will not be displayed.
  • Page 152 Controller Options * “Text Priority” is selected for text, and “Photo” for graphic objects and image objects. In the driver menu for Mac OS X, the “User Setting” option is shown at half brightness and cannot be selected.

  • Page 153: Camera Direct Print Card Type M26 (D3D8-13)

    Controller Options Camera Direct Print Card Type M26 (D3D8-13) • Turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from the wall socket. If installing without turning OFF the main power, an electric shock or a malfunction may occur. Remove the SD card slot cover [A].
  • Page 154 Controller Options Turn ON the power. Enter the SP mode, and then press “Enter” in SP5-878-004 (Option Setup: OCR Dictionary). The SD card ID is saved in the NVRAM, and the ID of the MFP is saved on the SD card. The MFP and SD card are thereby linked.

  • Page 155: Xps Direct Print Option Type M28 (D3E6-02, -19, -20)

    Controller Options 12. Check if [OCR Settings] is displayed on the [Send File Type / Name] screen. • After installation, the OCR setting can be changed on the "OCR setting" screen. • When setting up OCR, set [OCR setting] to [Yes]. (Default setting: [No]) Recovery Procedure When this option is installed, a function is saved on the HDD, and ID information on the SD card is saved in the NVRAM.

  • Page 156: Data Overwrite Security Unit Type M19 (D3Bs-03)

    Controller Options Remove the SD card slot cover [A]. Insert the SD card (XPS) in SD slot 1 (upper) with its label face to the front of the machine. Merge the SD card contents if necessary. (SD Card Appli Move) Attach the SD card slot cover.
  • Page 157 Controller Options • Administrator login password If any of these settings is at a factory default value, tell the customer these settings must be changed before you do the installation procedure. Make sure that “Admin. Authentication” is ON. [User Tools] > [Machine Features] > [System Settings] > [Administrator Tools] > [Administrator Authentication Management] >...
  • Page 158 Controller Options Installation Procedure • Turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from the wall socket. If installing without turning OFF the main power, an electric shock or a malfunction may occur. Remove the SD card slot cover [A]. Insert the SD card (DataOverwriteSecurity Unit) in SD slot 1 (upper) with its label face to the front of the machine.

  • Page 159: File Format Converter Type M19 (D3Br-04)

    Controller Options areas on the report (they must match): • "ROM Number / Firmware Version" - "HDD Format Option" • "Loading Program" Configuring "Auto Erase Memory" (Performed by the Customer) Refer to "Using Auto Erase Memory." File Format Converter Type M19 (D3BR-04) •...

  • Page 160: Ieee 1284 Interface Board Type M19 (D3C0-17)

    Controller Options Install the file format converter [A] into the slot and then fasten it with screws. Plug in and turn on the main power switch. Check or set the following SP codes with the values shown below. SP No. Title Setting SP5-836-001...

  • Page 161: Ieee 802.11A/G/N Interface Unit Type M19 (D3Br-01)

    Controller Options • USB Device Server Option • Extended USB board Remove the slot cover [A]. Install the interface board [A] into the slot. (Knob-screw × 2 [B]) Make sure that the machine can recognize the option (see Check All Connections at the end of this section).
  • Page 162 Controller Options • IEEE 1284 Interface Board • IEEE 802.11a/g/n Interface Unit • USB Device Server Option • Extended USB board Remove the slot cover [A] from the board slot. Install the wireless LAN board [A] (Knob × 2) into the board slot. Make sure that the machine can recognize the option (see Check All Connections at the end of this...
  • Page 163 Controller Options Do the following steps. • Peel off the double-sided tapes on the Velcro fasteners [A], and then attach them [A] at the front left and rear of the machine. • Attach "ANT1" (having a black ferrite core) [B] to the rear of the machine. •...
  • Page 164 Controller Options Press "Machine Features" > "System Settings". • Select "Interface Settings"> "Network" > "LAN Type". The "LAN Type" (default: Ethernet) must be set for either Ethernet or wireless LAN. Select "Interface Settings" > "Wireless LAN". Only the wireless LAN options show. Set the “Communication Mode”.

  • Page 165: Usb Device Server Option Type M19 (D3Bc-28, -29)

    Controller Options SP Mode and UP Mode Settings for IEEE 802.11a/g/n The following SP commands and UP modes can be set for IEEE 802.11a/g/n: SP No. Name Function SP5-840-011 WEP Key Used to select the WEP key (Default: 00). Select UP mode Name Function...
  • Page 166 Controller Options Installation Procedure • Turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from the wall socket. If installing without turning OFF the main power, an electric shock or a malfunction may occur. You can only install one of the following network interfaces at a time: •...
  • Page 167 Controller Options Open the front cover, and then remove the left cover [A]. Cut off the USB port cover [A] with nippers or other such tool. Reattach the left cover and upper left cover. Remove the interface slot cover [A].
  • Page 168 Controller Options Insert the interface board [A] in the interface slot and then fasten it with screws. Insert the USB cable into the USB port (Type A) [A] on the main machine, and insert the other side of the USB cable into the USB port (Type B) [B] on this option.
  • Page 169 Controller Options Attach the ferrite cores to the Ethernet cable, while looping the cable at 3 cm (approx. 1.2 inch) [A] from the each end of the cable. Only for installing this option in North America, bind both cores with cable ties [A] as shown below.
  • Page 170 Controller Options 10. Insert the Ethernet cable [A] into the Ethernet port on this option. 11. Insert the other end of the Ethernet cable to a PC for network setting. 12. Plug the power cord and turn ON the power. •...
  • Page 171 Controller Options Ping the “RX” + “MAC address” from the command prompt, on a windows PC which is on the same network as the mainframe. • When installing the USB Device Server Option Type M19, the installation status is not shown on the Configuration Page.
  • Page 172 Controller Options Press [Energy Saver Mode to Disable Print Server]. Press [Disable Mode]. Press [OK]. Press [Features Settings]. IP Address Setting This section describes how to set an IP address on this option manually. Note that you can set an IP address which is not only on the same network segment but also on a different network segment to share a single printer with devices in multiple networks.

  • Page 173: Extended Usb Board Type M19 (D3Bs-01)

    Controller Options Input [IP Address], [Subnet Mask] and [Default Gateway]. 10. Set other items if necessary. 11. Press [Set]. 12. Close the web browser. 13. Disconnect the Ethernet cable from the PC. 14. Connect the Ethernet cable to a network device (e.g. switching hub). 15.

  • Page 174: Check All Connections

    Controller Options Install the interface board [A] into the slot and then fasten it with screws. Make sure that the machine can recognize the option on Web Image Monitor. 1. Start Web Image Monitor. 2. Log in as the machine administrator. 3.

  • Page 175: Preventive Maintenance

    Maintenance Tables 3. Preventive Maintenance Maintenance Tables See "Appendices" for the following information: • Maintenance Tables...

  • Page 176: Pm/Yield Parts Settings

    PM/Yield Parts Settings PM/Yield Parts Settings Replacement Procedure of the PM/Yield Parts There are two ways to reset the PM counter for this machine. • Method 1: Reset by SP3-701 (New Unit Detection). This is the conventional method • Method 2: Reset by [PM Counter / New Unit Set] Menu Method 2 is recommended for its ease of operation.
  • Page 177 PM/Yield Parts Settings 3.Press [EXECUTE] to output the PM counter list. 4. Press [Exit]. In the SMC data, check the values of the counters in SP7-621-002 to 208, to determine what parts should be replaced. (Refer to the SP table in the appendix.) Set the following SPs (New Unit Detection) to "1"...
  • Page 178 PM/Yield Parts Settings Item C: SP3-701-221 M: SP3-701-222 Y: SP3-701-223 The PCDU and fusing unit detect a new unit automatically. Turn OFF the main power, and unplug the power cord. Replace the PM parts and turn ON the power. The machine will reset the PM counters automatically. In the case of the development unit, developer initialization will also be done automatically.
  • Page 179 PM/Yield Parts Settings 4. Press [Exit]. In the SMC data, check the values of the counters in SP 7-621-002 to 208, to determine what parts should be replaced. (Refer to the SP table in the appendix.) In the SP mode menu, press [PM Counter / New Unit Set]. Press [All PM Parts List : New Unit Set].

  • Page 180: After Installing The New Pm Parts

    PM/Yield Parts Settings Turn OFF the power and unplug the power cord. Replace the PM parts and turn ON the power. The machine will reset the PM counters automatically. In the case of the development unit, developer initialization will also be done automatically. Exit the SP mode.

  • Page 181: Preparation Before Operation Check

    PM/Yield Parts Settings 3. Press [EXECUTE] to output the PM counter list. Preparation before Operation Check Clean the exposure glasses (for DF and book scanning). Enter the user tools mode. Do the "Automatic Color Calibration (ACC)" for the copier mode and printer mode as follows: •...

  • Page 182: Operation Check

    PM/Yield Parts Settings Operation Check Check if the sample image has been copied correctly.

  • Page 183: Replacement And Adjustment

    Notes on the Main Power Switch 4. Replacement and Adjustment Notes on the Main Power Switch Push Switch The main power button of this machine has been changed to a push-button switch from the conventional rocker switch. The push switch has characteristics and specifications different from the rocker switch. Care must be taken when replacing and adjusting parts.
  • Page 184 Notes on the Main Power Switch unexpected power outages. By keeping the power flag ON, after the resumption of power, the machine will start up automatically. In rare cases, when you reconnect the AC power cord to a power outlet, the machine does not start automatically. In this case, the machine has not failed.

  • Page 185: Beforehand

    Beforehand Beforehand • Before installing options, please do the following: If there is a fax unit in the machine, print out all messages stored in the memory, the lists of user-programmed items, and the system parameter list. If there are printer jobs in the machine, print out all jobs in the printer buffer. Turn OFF the main switch and disconnect the power cord, the telephone line, and the network cable.

  • Page 186: Special Tools

    Special Tools Special Tools Part Number Description Q'ty B645 5010 SD Card 128MB B645 5020 SD Card 1GB B645 5030 SD Card 2GB B645 5040 SD Card 8GB 5203 9502 Silicone Grease G-501 A257 9300 Grease Barrierta – S552R C401 9503 20X Magnification Scope VSST 9003 C-5Y Color Chart (3 pcs/set)

  • Page 187: Image Adjustment

    Image Adjustment Image Adjustment How to Use the Color Charts Here is an introduction of how to check the image quality using the color charts. Check Area Check Item Description Frame line Registration amount Check the registration amount of the leading edge and trailing edge (sub scan direction).
  • Page 188 Image Adjustment Check Area Check Item Description are the same, it is a right angle. 1. Check the lengths between the leading edge and front end frame line at measuring positions [A] and [B]. 2. Check the lengths between the side edge and lateral frame line at measuring positions [C] and [D].
  • Page 189 Image Adjustment Check Area Check Item Description distortion to the frame line, and measure the deviation length from the baseline with the scale. A: Measuring length, B: Base line, C:Copy If meandering, measure the maximum amplitude. If difficult to measure, draw an auxiliary baseline, measure the deviation length from the baseline with the scale, and sum it up.
  • Page 190 Image Adjustment Check Area Check Item Description Halftone density Check that the density of each color patch in the 3rd row in the chart gradations and the copy are the same. scale Gray balance Check that the K density of the 3rd and 5th rows in the chart and the copy are the same.
  • Page 191 Image Adjustment Check Area Check Item Description Color Check that the density in the chart and a 2nd generation copy are reproducibility of the same. 2nd generation Radial lines Jagged slanting Check that the lines in the copy are not rough or jagged. lines Broken slanting Check that the lines in the copy are not broken.

  • Page 192: Scanning

    Image Adjustment Check Area Check Item Description Lot number Shows the lot number of the test chart. Chart name Reproduction of Check that the reproduced image is the same as the chart. black characters Portrait Reproducibility of Make a copy after setting the document type to photo mode, and photograph the skin, hair, and check the reproducibility of the photo.

  • Page 193: Adf Adjustment

    Image Adjustment Scanner Sub-Scan Magnification A: Sub-scan magnification Put the test chart on the exposure glass. Then make a copy from one of the feed stations. Check the magnification ratio. Adjust with SP4-008-001(Sub Scan Magnification Adj.) if necessary. Standard: ±1.0%. Scanner Leading Edge and Side-to-Side Registration A: Leading Edge Registration B: Side-to-side Registration...
  • Page 194 Image Adjustment Check the leading edge and side-to-side registration. Adjust the following SP modes if necessary. Standard: 4.2 ± 2.0 mm for the leading edge registration, 2.0 ± 1.0 mm for the side-to-side registration. The following diagram shows how the image is affected when you adjust in the + or -. direction. 1: Feed direction SP Code What It Does...

  • Page 195: Registration

    Image Adjustment ADF Sub-scan Magnification Put the temporary test chart on the ADF. Then make a copy from one of the feed stations. Check the magnification ratio. Adjust with SP6-017-001(ADF Adjustment L-Edge Mag) if necessary. • Standard: ±5.0% • Reduction mode: ±1.0% •...
  • Page 196 Image Adjustment SP No. SP Name Range SP1-002-002 Side-to-Side Registration: Tray 1 ± 4.0 mm SP1-002-003 Side-to-Side Registration: Tray 2 ± 4.0 mm SP1-002-004 Side-to-Side Registration: Tray 3 ± 4.0 mm SP1-002-005 Side-to-Side Registration: Duplex ± 4.0 mm Leading edge, Trailing edge Adjusts the leading edge registration for each paper type and process line speed.

  • Page 197: Erase Margin Adjustment

    Image Adjustment Adjustment Procedure Enter SP2-109-003. Print out the test pattern (14: 1-dot trimming pattern) with SP2-109-003. • Registration can change slightly as shown on the previous page. Print some pages of the 1-dot trimming pattern for steps 3 and 4. Then average the leading edge and side-to-side registration values, and adjust each SP mode.

  • Page 198: Color Registration

    Image Adjustment • Trailing edge: 0.0 to 9.9 mm (default: 4.2 mm) Color Registration Line Position Adjustment The automatic line position adjustment usually is done for a specified condition to get the best color prints. Do the following if color registration shifts: •...
  • Page 199 Image Adjustment Middle (Middle Levels 3 through 10 in the C5-Y chart 13-level scale Shadow (High Levels 7 through 12 in the C5-Y chart 13-level scale ID max Level 13 in the C5-Y chart 13-level scale (affects the entire image density) Offset The higher the number in the range associated with the low ID, middle ID, high ID, and ID max, the greater the density.
  • Page 200 Image Adjustment 2 Middle (Middle Adjust the offset value so that the density of level 7 matches that of level 7 on the C-5Y chart. (K, C, M, and 3 Shadow (High Adjust the offset value so that the density of level 11 matches that of level 11 on the C-5Y chart.
  • Page 201 Image Adjustment 3 Shadow (High Adjust the offset value so that the density of level 11 matches that of level 11 on the C-5Y chart. (K, C, M, and 4 Highlight Adjust the offset value so that dirty background does not (Low ID) show on the copy and the density of level 3 is slightly lighter (K, C, M, and...
  • Page 202 Image Adjustment Shadow SP1-104-002 SP1-104-022 SP1-104-042 SP1-104-062 Middle SP1-104-003 SP1-104-023 SP1-104-043 SP1-104-063 - Adjustment Procedure - Execute ACC for the printer mode. Enter the SP mode. Select "Printer SP". Select SP1-102-001. Then select the necessary print mode to adjust. Then select "2" that is used by default printing as priority.

  • Page 203: Color Skew Adjustment

    Image Adjustment Color Skew Adjustment The skew adjustment of this machine should be performed manually. The adjustment procedure is as follows: Open the front door [A] and then remove the paper exit tray [B]. ( x 1) Close the front door and execute MUSIC (SP2-111-004). Check the result for each color with the following SPs.
  • Page 204 Image Adjustment Rotate the knob(s) shown in the diagram [A] to [D] at 90 degree intervals until the SP value for the affected color(s) is within ±5 (target: 0). • There are two knobs on each of the two LD units. A click is felt every 90 degree rotation. •...

  • Page 205: Exterior Covers

    Exterior Covers Exterior Covers Front Cover Pull out the paper tray. Remove the front lower cover [A] ( × 1) Open the front cover.

  • Page 206: Upper Left Cover

    Exterior Covers Remove the front cover [A] ( × 2, pins × 2) Upper Left Cover Remove the upper left cover [A]. ( × 1) Left Cover Remove the upper left cover (Upper Left Cover) Pull out the paper tray. Open the front cover and remove the left cover [A].

  • Page 207: Rear Cover

    Exterior Covers Rear Cover Remove the rear cover [A].

  • Page 208: Right Rear Cover

    Exterior Covers Right Rear Cover Open the right cover. Remove the right rear cover [A] ( × 3) • Remove the right rear cover while pushing it downward. Paper Exit Tray Open the front cover. Remove the paper exit tray [A]. ( ×...
  • Page 209 Exterior Covers Remove the bracket [A]. Remove the cover [A] under the operation panel. Remove the bracket [A].
  • Page 210 Exterior Covers Disconnect the harness [B] to remove the inner cover [A]. Remove the scanner inner cover [A].

  • Page 211: Ozone Filter

    Exterior Covers Ozone Filter Remove the filter cover [A]. Remove the ozone filter [A] from the filter cover.

  • Page 212: Operation Panel

    Operation Panel Operation Panel The replacement procedures for the other parts are included in the FSM for the Smart Operation Panel, because these parts are also used with other models. Operation Panel Open the right cover. Remove the front right cover [A] and hinge cover [B]. Remove the screws fixing the operation panel [A].
  • Page 213 Operation Panel • Spread a cloth or service mat [A] on the paper exit tray to protect the display. Place the operation panel on the paper exit tray so that the display faces down. Remove the small rear cover [A]. Disconnect the connector [A].
  • Page 214 Operation Panel Remove the rear cover [A]. Remove the hinge base cover [A]. Remove the hinge base [A]. Check before Installing the New Operation Panel There is a DIP switch [A] on the sub board in the operation panel unit.

  • Page 215: Internal Parts

    Operation Panel The switch setting to use depends on the model. For the C307/C407 series, make sure that switches 3 and 7 are ON. Otherwise, SC672-11 occurs when starting the machine. Internal Parts Refer to the FSM for the Smart Operation Panel.

  • Page 216: Adf

    ADF Unit Remove the rear cover. (Rear Cover) Remove the scanner rear cover [A] and scanner rear small cover [B]. Release the two screws and three tabs for attaching the relay board [A] and FFC to release the FFC. Remove the FFC fixing bracket [A] on the back side of the FFC. Remove the FFC fixing bracket while turning it counterclockwise and releasing the tab.
  • Page 217 Disconnect the harness [A] from the ADF. Disconnect the FFC [A] from the relay board. Disconnect the FFC for the relay board by pulling it out straight, because it does not have a lock mechanism. When reassembling, the FFC must be connected straight.
  • Page 218 Remove the shoulder screw for fixing the ADF. Remove the ADF unit [A] from the machine. When Installing the ADF Open the ADF. Do the following steps: • Place the platen sheet [A] on the exposure glass.

  • Page 219: Adf Rear Cover

    • Align the platen sheet with Velcro tape [C], with the rear left corner [B] on the exposure glass as a reference. Close the ADF. Reopen the ADF. Press the surface of the platen sheet gently to fix it on the ADF firmly. Adjustment after ADF Unit Replacement "Adjustment after CIS Unit Replacement".

  • Page 220: Adf Front Cover

    Open the ADF [A], and release the five tabs of the ADF rear cover by using a thin screwdriver. Remove the ADF rear cover [A]. ADF Front Cover Open the ADF top cover [A].

  • Page 221: Original Feed Unit

    Remove the screw, and lift up the original tray [B]. Open the ADF, then release the three tabs of the ADF front cover [A]. Close the ADF slightly, then remove the ADF front cover [A] while releasing the two tabs with a thin screwdriver.

  • Page 222: Pickup Roller, Feed Roller

    Slide the shaft [A] of the original feed unit toward the rear to remove it. Pickup Roller, Feed Roller Before Replacing the Pickup Roller and Feed Roller Before replacing the pickup roller and feed roller, reset the PM counter. Turn the power ON. Reset the PM counter.
  • Page 223 Slide the shaft [A], and then remove the pickup roller [B]. Replacing the Feed Roller Remove the original feed unit. (Original Feed Unit) Remove the clip [A]. Slide the shaft [A], and then remove the pin [B].

  • Page 224: Adf Friction Pad

    Slide the shaft [A], and then remove the feed roller [B]. ADF Friction Pad Before Replacing the Friction Pad Before replacing the friction pad, reset the PM counter. Turn the power ON. Reset the PM counter. (Refer to Replacement Procedure of the PM/Yield Parts) Turn the power OFF.

  • Page 225: Top Cover Set Sensor, Original Set Sensor

    Remove the ADF relay board [A] while releasing the hook. Top Cover Set Sensor, Original Set Sensor Remove the ADF front cover (ADF Front Cover) Remove the top cover set sensor [A]. Remove the original set sensor [A]. ADF Drive Motor Remove the ADF rear cover.

  • Page 226: Adf Feed Clutch

    Remove the ADF drive motor [A]. ADF Feed Clutch Remove the ADF front cover. (ADF Front Cover) Release the hook while swinging up the original tray [A], and then remove the harness guide [B]. Remove the ADF feed clutch [A]. ADF Registration Sensor Remove the ADF front cover.

  • Page 227: Adf Feed Sensor

    Slide the hook [B], and then remove the white plate [C]. Remove the ADF registration sensor holder [A]. Remove the ADF registration sensor [A] from the holder. ADF Feed Sensor Remove the ADF rear cover. (ADF Rear Cover)
  • Page 228 Disconnect the harness [A] from the ADF top cover [B], and release the clamp. Remove the harness [A] from the harness guide. Remove the ADF top cover [A].
  • Page 229 Remove the five screws and release the four tabs, and then remove the inner cover [A]. Remove the ADF feed sensor [A]. • When reattaching the ADF top cover, make sure it is set correctly so that the two tabs fit into the holes.

  • Page 230: Cis Unit

    CIS Unit Remove the ADF rear cover. (ADF Rear Cover) Remove the ADF front cover. (ADF Front Cover) Remove the original feed unit. (Original Feed Unit) Remove the ADF inner cover [A]. Lift the back of the ADF inner cover [A] while swinging up the original tray [B], and then slide the ADF inner cover toward the back of the ADF unit.
  • Page 231 Disconnect the FFC [A]. Release the hook while swinging up the original tray [A], and then remove the harness guide [B].
  • Page 232 Remove the gear bracket [A]. Remove the two gears [A]. Do not remove the gear [B], to prevent the inner pin [C] from dropping into the machine. Open the ADF unit [A] while holding the gear [B] by hand, and open the scanning guide plate (rear side) [C] by pulling the release lever [D].
  • Page 233 10. Pull out the CIS unit [A] from the ADF unit. The CIS unit can be easily removed by pushing it from behind. When reattaching the ADF inner cover, make sure that the shaft [A] fits into the groove (this is the shaft of the lock lever for the friction pad on the back side of the cover).
  • Page 234 Adjustment after CIS Unit Replacement Correct the color deviation of the CIS after replacing the ADF unit or CIS unit. Perform the registration adjustment of the ADF (back side). (ADF Side-to-Side and Leading Edge Registration) Print an ACC test pattern. [User Tools] icon >...
  • Page 235 Turn over the ACC test pattern [A] and set it on the ADF. (Set the arrow position of the test pattern in accordance with the arrow position of the photograph below.) Exit the User Tools mode, and then enter the SP mode. Execute SP4-958-001 (Read/Restore Std: Rear: Read New Chart).

  • Page 236: Scanner

    Scanner Scanner Scanner Unit Remove the ADF. (ADF Unit) Remove the right rear cover. (Right Rear Cover) Remove the upper left cover. (Upper Left Cover) Remove the front right cover [A]. Remove the grounding plate [A]. Disconnect the harnesses and FFC from the scanner unit. When lifting the scanner unit, move the harnesses out of the frame so that they do not interfere.

  • Page 237: Scanner Unit With The Adf

    Scanner • When disconnecting or connecting the FFC, push the lock button to unlock it as shown below. • If the FFC is not connected correctly, SC101 may occur. Remove the scanner unit [A]. Scanner Unit with the ADF Remove the rear cover. (Rear Cover) Remove the right rear cover.
  • Page 238 Scanner Remove the front right cover [A]. Remove the scanner rear cover [A] and scanner rear small cover [B]. Release two screws and three tabs for attaching the relay board [A] and FFC, to release the FFC.
  • Page 239 Scanner Remove the FFC fixing bracket [A] on the back side of the FFC. Remove the FFC fixing bracket while turning it counterclockwise and releasing the tab. Release the clamp for the harness [A] to the ADF.
  • Page 240 Scanner Remove the grounding plate [A]. 10. Disconnect the FFC [A] from the relay board. Disconnect the FFC for relay board by pulling it out straight, because it does not have a lock mechanism. When reassembling, the FFC must be connected straight. 11.

  • Page 241: Adf Set Sensor

    Scanner If the FFC is not connected correctly, SC101 may occur. 12. Remove the scanner unit [B] with the ADF [A]. ADF Set Sensor Remove the scanner unit. (Scanner Unit)
  • Page 242 Scanner Remove the scanner front cover [A]. Remove the scanner upper cover [A]. Remove the ADF set sensor [A].

  • Page 243: Scanner Front Cover

    Scanner Scanner Front Cover Open the right cover, and then remove the front right cover [A]. Open the ADF. Remove the scanner front cover [A]. Use a short screwdriver. There are five tabs on the back of the scanner front cover. Scanner HP Sensor Remove the ADF unit.
  • Page 244 Scanner Remove the scanner upper cover [A]. Move the scanner carriage to the right. • To move the carriage, hold the carriage belt and move it carefully. • Never hold the carriage itself.

  • Page 245: Scanner Motor

    Scanner Remove the brackets [A][B]. Remove the scanner HP sensor [B] while lifting up the bracket [A] slightly. Scanner Motor Remove the ADF unit. (ADF Unit) Remove the scanner front cover. (Scanner Front Cover) Remove the scanner upper cover [A].
  • Page 246 Scanner Remove the shield plate [A]. ( × 2) Remove the scanner motor with the bracket [A]. ( × 3, belt × 1)

  • Page 247: Scanner Carriage

    Scanner Remove the scanner motor [A]. ( × 1, × 2) Scanner Carriage Remove the ADF unit. (ADF Unit) Remove the scanner front cover. (Scanner Front Cover) Remove the scanner upper cover [A].
  • Page 248 Scanner Move the carriage to the right. • To move the carriage, hold the carriage belt and move it carefully. • Never hold the carriage itself. Remove the brackets [A][B].
  • Page 249 Scanner Slide the bracket [A] and then detach the carriage belt [B] from the pulley. Disconnect the FFC [B] while lifting up the scanner carriage [A]. ( • In the area [C], the FFC is attached with double-sided tape. Do not try to strip the FFC [B] off by force.
  • Page 250 Scanner • Never connect the FFC to the carriage connector at an angle. Otherwise, the BiCU or the SBU may be damaged. • The FFC must not be sagging and must not drag on the bottom of the scanner unit [B]. •...

  • Page 251: Laser Optics

    Laser Optics Laser Optics • Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the procedures in this section. Laser beams can cause serious eye injury. Caution Decal Location The caution decal is attached as shown below. Laser Units •...
  • Page 252 Laser Optics • Be sure to install the washer under the screw when assembling. Pull the laser unit [A] out slightly, open the connector cover, and then disconnect the FFC [B]. ( × 1)

  • Page 253: Ld Unit Cooling Fan

    Laser Optics • Unlock the FFC [A] by lowering the white tab. • Never touch the shield glass under the laser units when replacing them. Adjustment after Laser Unit Replacement Do the following settings after replacing the laser unit. Initializing the D-Phase data and shading data Plug in and turn on the main power switch of the machine.
  • Page 254 Laser Optics Remove the LD unit cooling fan [A]. ( × 1)

  • Page 255: Pcdu, Toner Supply

    PCDU (Photo Conductor and Development Unit) • The PCDU (K) for MP C307 is different from the one for MP C407. Make sure that you use the correct part number when ordering a PCDU (K). Remove the waste toner bottle.

  • Page 256: Toner Bottle Detection Board

    PCDU, Toner Supply Remove the PCDU [A] ( × 2, × 1, × 1) • Before putting the PCDU back in the machine, check that the ITB has no tension. See step 3 for how to do this. Put the removed PCDU on a flat surface with a sheet of paper under it. •...

  • Page 257: Toner Supply Motors

    PCDU, Toner Supply Remove the toner bottle detection board [A]. ( × 4, × 3, × 9) Toner Supply Motors • The following is the replacement procedure for Y. The motors for the other three colors can be replaced with the same procedure as Y. Remove the toner bottle detection board.

  • Page 258: Toner Transport Section

    PCDU, Toner Supply Remove the shaft [A], bearing [B], and gear [C]. ( × 1 each) Remove the toner supply motor [A]. ( × 2 each) Toner Transport Section Before Replacing the Toner Transport Section Before replacing the toner transport section (the toner sub-hopper), reset the PM counter and execute the forced toner supply.
  • Page 259 PCDU, Toner Supply Replacing the Toner Transport Section Remove the toner supply motors (All colors). (Toner Supply Motors) • After removing the toner supply motor, secure four screws [A] on the toner transport section to prevent toner from flying off. Remove the toner bottles (all colors).
  • Page 260 PCDU, Toner Supply Remove the toner transport section [A]. ( × 1)

  • Page 261: Waste Toner

    Waste Toner Waste Toner Waste Toner Bottle Before Replacing the Waste Toner Bottle When you replace the waste toner bottle AFTER a waste toner full or near-full message appears on the operation panel, the PM counters are automatically cleared after turning the main power ON. When you replace the waste toner bottle BEFORE a waste toner full or near-full message appears on the operation panel, do the following procedure to reset the PM counter.

  • Page 262: Waste Toner Full Sensor

    Waste Toner Install the five waste toner bottle caps on the waste toner inlets. The examples [A] in the photo are for black. Waste Toner Full Sensor Remove the waste toner bottle. (Waste Toner Bottle) Remove the waste toner full sensor [A]. ( ×...
  • Page 263 Waste Toner Remove the waste toner bottle set switch [A]. ( × 1) • Release the tab with a jeweler’s screwdriver to remove the switch. Remove the harness from the waste toner bottle set switch [A]. ( × 1)

  • Page 264: Image/Paper Transfer

    Image/Paper Transfer Image/Paper Transfer ITB (Image Transfer Belt) Unit Before Replacing the ITB Unit Before replacing the ITB unit, reset the PM counter. Turn the power ON. Reset the PM counter. (Refer to Replacement Procedure of the PM/Yield Parts) Turn the power OFF. Replacing the ITB Unit Remove all the PCDUs (PCDU (Photo Conductor and Development...
  • Page 265 Image/Paper Transfer Release the tension belt [A]. ( × 1) Put a sheet of paper [A] on the duplex unit with the short edge of the paper pointing towards the ITB unit. • This is to protect the paper transfer unit from toner when removing the ITB unit. Remove the ITB unit securing bracket [A].

  • Page 266: Itb Contact Motor

    Image/Paper Transfer Pull out the ITB unit [A]. After Replacing the Image Transfer Belt Unit Do the following after replacing the ITB unit. Enter the SP mode. Set SP1-001-031 (Leading Edge Registration Std. Measure: On/Off) to “1”. Execute SP2-111-004 (Forced Line Position Adj. Mode d). SP values from SP1-001-033 to 040 (Leading Edge Registration Offset Standard: 1 to 8) are updated by the above steps.

  • Page 267: Itb Contact Hp Sensor

    Image/Paper Transfer Remove the cover [A]. ( × 2) Remove the gear [A] and ITB contact motor [B]. ( × 2) ITB Contact HP Sensor Remove the drive unit. (Drive Unit) Remove the ITB contact unit [A]. ( × 3, ×...

  • Page 268: Id Sensor

    Image/Paper Transfer Remove the ITB contact HP sensor with the bracket [A]. ( × 1, × 1) Remove the ITB contact HP sensor [A]. (Hook × 2) ID Sensor Remove the ITB unit. (ITB (Image Transfer Belt) Unit) Remove the guide plate [A]. ( ×...
  • Page 269 Image/Paper Transfer Remove the ID sensor [A] with the bracket. ( × 1) Remove the ID sensor [A]. ( × 4, × 1, × 1) • When cleaning the ID sensor, wipe the parts [A] with a damp cloth. • Do not wipe it with a dry cloth, or the ID sensor may attract dirt because of static electricity.

  • Page 270: Id Sensor Shutter Solenoid

    Image/Paper Transfer Plug in and turn on the main power. Enter the SP mode. Enter all correction coefficients [A] for the ID sensor with the SP modes, referring to the barcode sheet provided with the new ID sensor board. • For example, enter “1.2”...

  • Page 271: Paper Transfer Roller Unit

    Image/Paper Transfer Remove the ID sensor shutter solenoid [A]. ( × 2, × 1, × 1, × 1) Paper Transfer Roller Unit Before Replacing the Paper Transfer Roller Unit Before replacing the paper transfer roller unit, reset the PM counter. Turn the power ON.
  • Page 272 Image/Paper Transfer Remove the paper transfer unit [A] while holding the knobs on both ends of the paper transfer roller with your fingers.

  • Page 273: Drive

    Drive Drive Overview Development motor (CMY) Drum motor (CMY) Drum motor (K) Development clutch (K) Tray lift motor Fusing motor Paper transport motor Registration clutch Duplex clutch 10. Bypass feed clutch 11. Paper feed clutch 12. Bypass lift clutch 13. Reverse clutch 14.

  • Page 274: Drum Motor (Cmy)

    Drive Remove the development motor (CMY) [A]. ( × 4, × 1) Drum Motor (CMY) Remove the power pack (Transfer) with the bracket. (Power Pack (Transfer)) Remove the drum motor (CMY) [A]. ( × 4, × 1) Drum Motor (K) Remove the power pack (Transfer) with the bracket.

  • Page 275: Drive Unit

    Drive Remove the development clutch cover [A] by rotating it counterclockwise. ( × 1, × 1, × 1) Remove the development clutch [A]. Drive Unit Remove the toner transport section. (Toner Transport Section) Remove the development motor (CMY). (Development Motor (CMY)) Remove the drum motor (CMY).

  • Page 276: Tray Lift Motor

    Drive Remove the drive unit [A]. ( × 6) Tray Lift Motor Remove the drive unit. (Drive Unit) Remove the tray lift motor unit [A]. ( × 2, × 2, × 1) Remove the motor cover [A]. ( × 2) Remove the tray lift motor [A].

  • Page 277: Fusing Motor

    Drive Fusing Motor Remove the PSUs with the bracket. (PSU (AC), PSU (DC)) Remove the DC switch cover [A]. ( × 2, × 1) Remove the power pack (Development). (Power Pack (Development)) Release the harness and remove the harness guide [A]. ( ×...

  • Page 278: Paper Transport Motor

    Drive Paper Transport Motor Remove the fusing motor. (Fusing Motor) Remove the fusing motor bracket [A]. ( × 2) Remove the harness guide [A]. ( × 3, × 14) • There are connectors behind the harness guide. Remove the guide carefully.

  • Page 279: Duplex Clutch, Bypass Feed Clutch, Registration Clutch, Paper Feed Clutch

    Drive Remove the paper transport motor [A]. Duplex Clutch, Bypass Feed Clutch, Registration Clutch, Paper Feed Clutch Remove the paper transport motor. (Paper Transport Motor) Remove the power pack (Transfer) with the bracket. (Power Pack (Transfer)) Remove the gear cover [A] and gear [B]. ( ×...
  • Page 280 Drive Remove the paper transport unit cover [A]. ( × 4) Remove each clutch. ( × 1 each) [A]: Duplex clutch [B]: Bypass feed clutch [C]: Paper feed clutch [D]: Registration clutch...

  • Page 281: Fusing

    Fusing Fusing Fusing Unit • Turn off the main switch and wait until the fusing unit cools down before beginning any of the procedures in this section. The fusing unit can cause serious burns. • Basically, the entire fusing unit must be replaced when SC544-00 or SC554-00 occurs. •...

  • Page 282: Fusing Lower Cover

    Fusing Remove the fusing upper cover [A]. ( × 4) Fusing Lower Cover Remove the fusing unit. (Fusing Unit) Remove the fusing lower cover [A]. ( × 4) Fusing Entrance Guide Plate Remove the fusing unit. (Fusing Unit) Remove the fusing entrance guide plate [A]. ( ×...

  • Page 283: Fusing Thermostat

    Fusing tightening the entrance guide plate. • Different types of screws are used for [A] and [B]: [A]: Shoulder screw [B]: Double sems screw (a screw with a washer) Fusing Thermostat Remove the fusing upper cover. (Fusing Upper Cover) Remove the fusing thermostat [A]. ( ×...

  • Page 284: Fusing Pressure Roller Thermistors

    Fusing Push the hooks and remove the fusing thermistor [A]. ( × 1). Fusing Pressure Roller Thermistors Remove the fusing upper cover (Fusing Upper Cover) Raise the fusing lever. Remove the bracket [A]. ( × 4)

  • Page 285: Pressure Roller

    Fusing • Lift the fusing lever while removing the upper screws. Remove the pressure roller thermistors [A], [B] or [C]. A: Pressure roller thermistor (Front) B: Pressure roller thermistor (Center) C: Pressure roller thermistor (Rear) Pressure Roller Before Replacing the Pressure Roller Before replacing the pressure roller, reset the PM counter.

  • Page 286: Fusing Sleeve Belt Assembly

    Fusing Remove the pressure roller [A]. Fusing Sleeve Belt Assembly Before Replacing the Fusing Sleeve Belt Assembly Before replacing the fusing sleeve belt assembly, reset the PM counter. Turn the power ON. Reset the PM counter. (Refer to Replacement Procedure of the PM/Yield Parts) Turn the power OFF.
  • Page 287 Fusing Remove the springs [B], which are on both ends of the separation plate [A], from the holes in the frame. × 2) Remove the springs [B], which are on both ends of the separation plate [A], from the holes in the separation plate.
  • Page 288 Fusing Do not apply excess force to the separation plate when removing it, to prevent the separation plate from deforming. When reattaching the separation plate, make sure that the plate is firmly attached to the frame hole. Remove the fusing lamp harnesses. ( ×...
  • Page 289 Fusing 11. Remove the screws of the frame [A] at the left. ( × 2) 12. Pull out the rear frame [A], and take out the fusing sleeve belt assembly [B]. Do not touch the surface of the fusing sleeve belt assembly. When reattaching the rear frame, do not let the fusing sleeve belt hit the projection of the thermostat and the frame.

  • Page 290: Fusing Entrance Sensor

    Fusing Make sure that both side plates fit right into the locating bosses of the frame before securing the screws. The new fusing sleeve belt assembly has a jig [A], which must be removed. Set the fusing sleeve belt assembly first, tighten the screws, then remove the jig.

  • Page 291: Fusing Exit Sensor

    Fusing Remove the fusing entrance sensor [A]. ( × 1, × 1) Fusing Exit Sensor Remove the paper exit unit. (Paper Exit Unit) Remove the fusing exit sensor [A]. ( × 1, × 1) Fusing Thermopile Remove the paper exit unit. (Paper Exit Unit)

  • Page 292: New Fusing Unit Detection Fuse

    Fusing Remove the fusing thermopile with the bracket [A]. ( × 1, × 1) Remove the fusing thermopile [A]. ( × 1) New Fusing Unit Detection Fuse Remove the fusing upper cover. (Fusing Upper Cover)

  • Page 293: Actions When Sc544-00 Or Sc554-00 Occurs

    Fusing Remove the new fusing unit detection fuse [A] if the old blown fuse is attached. ( x 1) Connect the fuse connector, and insert the fuse into place from the upper side. • Refer to the flow chart below when SC544-00 or SC554-00 occurs. (Actions When SC544-00 or SC554-00 Occurs)
  • Page 294 Fusing Make sure to keep the door closed when executing SP5810-002. If executed with the door open, the SC will not be cleared. The SC is cleared when the fuse blows and is not cleared when the fuse does not blow. The SC reset should be performed again if it fails.

  • Page 295: Paper Feed

    Paper Feed Paper Feed Paper Feed Roller, Friction Pad (Standard Tray) Before Replacing the Paper Feed Roller and Friction Pad Before replacing the paper feed roller and friction pad, reset the PM counter. Turn the power ON. Reset the PM counter. (Refer to Replacement Procedure of the PM/Yield Parts) Turn the power OFF.

  • Page 296: Registration Sensor, Paper Feed Sensor

    Paper Feed Remove the paper feed roller. (Hook × 1) Remove the friction pad [A]. (Hooks × 2) Registration Sensor, Paper Feed Sensor Open the right door. • If you find paper dust in the registration section when you open the duplex unit, remove the dust. Otherwise, the dust can cause lines on the image.
  • Page 297 Paper Feed Pull down the guide plate [A]. Remove the sensor cover [B]. ( × 2) Remove the sensor bracket [A]. ( × 2, × 2) Remove the registration sensor [A]. (Hook × 2)

  • Page 298: Tray Paper End Sensor

    Paper Feed Remove the paper feed sensor [B]. (Hook × 2) Tray Paper End Sensor Remove the waste toner bottle. (Waste Toner Bottle) Remove the tray paper end sensor [A]. ( × 1, hook × 2) When reattaching the tray paper end sensor, make sure that the shaft of the feeler is hooked onto the bracket [A].

  • Page 299: Tray Lift Sensor

    Paper Feed Tray Lift Sensor Remove the waste toner bottle. (Waste Toner Bottle) Remove the tray lift sensor [A]. ( × 1, hook × 2) Draw-in Unit Remove the PSU fan. (PSU Fan) Remove the rear cover. (Rear Cover) Remove the screw. ( ×...
  • Page 300 Paper Feed Remove the bracket [B] and grounding plate [C] from the draw-in unit [A]. • When installing the draw-in unit, fit the bracket’s holes onto the bosses on the mainframe. ( ×...

  • Page 301: Bypass

    Bypass Bypass Bypass Tray Open the bypass tray [A]. Remove the stopper [A], and E-rings. ( × 2, Stopper × 1)

  • Page 302: Bypass Feed Unit

    Bypass Close the bypass tray [A] slightly and pull it out upwards. Bypass Feed Unit Remove the duplex unit. (Duplex Unit) Disconnect the connector. ( × 1)

  • Page 303: Bypass Paper End Sensor

    Bypass Remove the two screws. ( × 2) Remove the bypass feed unit [A]. • Lift up the left side of the unit and remove it while pulling it out forward. Bypass Paper End Sensor Remove the bypass feed unit. (Bypass Feed Unit)
  • Page 304 Bypass Remove the bracket [A]. ( × 2) Remove the bypass paper end sensor with the holder [A]. ( × 1)

  • Page 305: Bypass Paper Width Sensor

    Bypass Remove the sensor holder [A]. (Hook × 2) Remove the bypass paper end sensor [A]. ( × 1) Bypass Paper Width Sensor Remove the bypass feed unit. (Bypass Feed Unit)
  • Page 306 Bypass Remove the bracket [A]. ( × 2) Remove the bypass paper width sensor with the holder [A]. ( × 1)

  • Page 307: Bypass Feed Roller

    Bypass Remove the bypass paper width sensor [A]. (Hooks × 4) Bypass Feed Roller Before Replacing the Bypass Feed Roller Before replacing the bypass feed roller, reset the PM counter. Turn the power ON. Reset the PM counter. (Refer to Replacement Procedure of the PM/Yield Parts) Turn the power OFF.
  • Page 308 Bypass Remove the bracket [A]. ( × 1) Remove the E-ring [A] and bearing [B] at the front of the bypass feed unit. ( × 1, bearing × 1)
  • Page 309 Bypass Remove the E-ring and the gear at the rear of the bypass feed unit. ( × 1, gear × 1) Bearing (bearing × 1)
  • Page 310 Bypass E-ring at the front of the bypass feed unit ( × 1) E-ring at the rear of the bypass feed unit ( × 1)
  • Page 311 Bypass Move the front cam and rear cam [B] inward while pushing down the bottom plate [A]. Remove the bypass feed roller with the shaft from the front side.

  • Page 312: Bypass Lift Sensor

    Bypass 10. Bypass feed roller [A] (Hook × 1) Bypass Lift Sensor Remove the bypass feed unit. (Bypass Feed Unit) Remove the sensor holder [A]. ( × 2, × 1)

  • Page 313: Bypass Lift Clutch

    Bypass Remove the gear [A] and bypass lift sensor [B]. (Hooks × 4) Bypass Lift Clutch Remove the bypass feed unit. (Bypass Feed Unit) Remove the bracket [A]. ( × 2)
  • Page 314 Bypass Disconnect the connector of the clutch. ( × 1) Remove the bypass lift clutch [A]. ( × 1)

  • Page 315: Paper Exit

    Paper Exit Paper Exit Paper Exit Unit Remove the scanner inner cover. (Scanner Inner Cover) Remove the paper exit unit [A]. Paper Exit Sensor Remove the paper exit unit. (Paper Exit Unit) Remove the sensor holder [A].

  • Page 316: Exit Junction Gate Solenoid

    Paper Exit Remove the paper exit sensor [A]. ( × 1) Exit Junction Gate Solenoid Remove the paper exit unit. (Paper Exit Unit) Remove the exit junction gate solenoid [A] with the bracket.
  • Page 317 Paper Exit Remove the bracket from the exit junction gate solenoid [A]. When reattaching the exit junction gate solenoid, make sure that the solenoid works in conjunction with the exit junction gate. Paper Exit Clutch, Reverse Clutch Remove the paper exit unit. (Paper Exit Unit)
  • Page 318 Paper Exit Remove the cover [A]. Pull out the bearing [A]. Remove the paper exit clutch and reverse clutch with the bracket [A].
  • Page 319 Paper Exit Remove the paper exit clutch [A] and reverse clutch [B].
  • Page 320 Duplex Duplex Duplex Unit Open the right door. Push the lever and reduce the tension of the belt [A], then remove the belt. When reattaching the duplex unit, make sure that the belt [A] is attached firmly. If the belt is not attached, the right door will not be opened even if the opening/closing lever is operated.
  • Page 321 Duplex Remove the two screws on the paper transport unit [A]. ( × 2) Lift the paper transport unit [A]. Remove the tension spring cover [A]. ( × 1)
  • Page 322 Duplex Lift the duplex unit, then remove the tension spring [A]. Release the tension wire [A] from the roller [B].
  • Page 323 Duplex Restore the paper transport unit [A]. Remove the connector cover [A].
  • Page 324 Duplex 10. Disconnect the connectors. ( × 2, × 1) 11. Release the belt [A] and then remove the duplex unit [B]. • Belt [A] ( × 1) • Duplex unit [B] ( × 4) Duplex Entrance Sensor Open the right door.
  • Page 325 Duplex Remove the sensor cover [A]. (Hooks × 3) Remove the duplex entrance sensor [A]. ( × 1) Duplex Exit Sensor Remove the paper transfer roller unit. (Paper Transfer Roller Unit) Remove the cover [A]. (Hook × 1)
  • Page 326 Duplex Remove the bracket [A]. ( × 1) Remove the registration roller unit [A]. Remove the sensor bracket [A]. ( × 1) Remove the duplex exit sensor [A]. ( × 1)
  • Page 327 Duplex Right Cover Switch Open the right door. Release the tab of the right cover switch [A] with a jeweler’s screwdriver. Remove the right cover switch [A]. ( × 1)
  • Page 328 Electrical Components Electrical Components Electrical Components Overview BiCU Controller Board FCU (if the machine has the fax unit) PSU (AC) PSU (DC) Power Pack (Development) Toner Bottle Detection Board AC Detection Board 10. Power Pack (Transfer)
  • Page 329 Electrical Components • Before replacing the HDD, copy the address book data to an SD card with SP5-846-051 if there is no problem. • If the customer uses the Data Overwrite Security, IC card reader, or OCR unit, these applications must be installed again after replacing the HDD.
  • Page 330 Electrical Components Cycle the power Off/On. Controller Board • Keep NVRAMs away from any objects that can cause static electricity. Static electricity can damage NVRAM data. Remove the rear cover. (Rear Cover) Remove the left cover. (Left Cover) Remove the FCU (if the machine has the fax unit) (Refer to the FSM for Fax Option) Remove the controller box cover [A] with the HDD [B].
  • Page 331 Electrical Components board. • Make sure the NVRAM [A] is installed at the correct mounting location and orientation. Install the NVRAM so that the indentation on the NVRAM corresponds with the mark [B] on the controller board. • Incorrect installation of the NVRAM will damage both the controller board and NVRAM. NVRAM on the controller board •...
  • Page 332 Electrical Components Print the Box List with the User Tools/Counter. • [User Tools/Counter] - [Facsimile Features] - [General Settings] - [Box Setting: Print List] Print the Special Sender List by pressing these buttons in the following order. • [User Tools/Counter] - [Facsimile Features] - [Reception Settings] - [Program Special Sender: Print List] Write down the following fax settings.
  • Page 333 Electrical Components 12. Cycle the main power OFF/ON with the SD card where the NV-RAM data has been uploaded in SD slot 2. • SC992 appears at start-up, but this is normal behavior. This is because information written to the NV-RAM and on the hard disk do not match due to replacement of the NV-RAM.
  • Page 334 Electrical Components • Replace all PM parts because all PM counters will be reset. • If a message tells you need an SD card to restore displays after the NVRAM replacement, create a “SD card for restoration” and restore with the SD card. Refer to “Encryption Key Restoration”...
  • Page 335 Electrical Components Remove the NVRAM from the old BiCU and attach it to the new BiCU. • Attaching the used NVRAM to the new BiCU allows users to use old data such as SP settings. • SC995 occurs when replacing the BiCU. Execute SP5-811-004 then turn the main power off and •...
  • Page 336 Electrical Components • When the power is turned ON, SC195-00 appears. Continue with the following steps. Select the destination setting (SP5-131-001 - JPN: 0, NA: 1, EU/AA/TWN/CHN: 2). • After changing the EEPROM, some SPs do not have the correct values. •...
  • Page 337 Electrical Components Remove the FFC fixing bracket [A] on the back side of the FFC. Remove the FFC fixing bracket while turning it counterclockwise and releasing the tab.
  • Page 338 Electrical Components Release the clamp of the harness to the ADF [A]. Remove the grounding plate [A]. Remove the controller box cover [A] with the HDD [B]. 10. Disconnect all the connectors on the BiCU [A]. Remove the clamps to make room for removal of the BiCU [A].
  • Page 339 Electrical Components 11. Do the following steps: • Remove the grounding wire [A] and connector [B] from the left side of the controller box. • Remove the harness guide [C] while releasing the harnesses on it.
  • Page 340 Electrical Components 12. Remove the brackets ([A] and [B]), and two screws from the right side of the controller box. 13. Remove the controller box [A]. PSU (AC), PSU (DC) • Do not touch the areas outlined in red in the following diagrams when replacing the PSU. Residual charge on the board may cause electric shock.
  • Page 341 Electrical Components • For 200V: Remove the controller box. (Controller Box) Remove the PSU fan. (PSU Fan) Disconnect the harness and remove the harness guide [A]. ( ×3, ×2, Hook ×1) The next step varies according to the parts that you want to remove.
  • Page 342 Electrical Components • For removing the PSUs with the bracket, disconnect the connectors on the PSU (AC) [A] and PSU (DC) [B]. • For removing the PSU (DC) alone, remove the PSU (DC) [A]. ( ×4, ×5, Locking wire saddle ×1)
  • Page 343 Electrical Components • For removing the PSU (AC) alone, remove the PSU (AC) [A]. AC Detection Board Remove the PSU with the bracket. (PSU (AC), PSU (DC)) Remove the AC detection board with the bracket [A]. ( × 1, × 1) Remove the AC detection board [A].
  • Page 344 Electrical Components Disconnect the harness and remove the harness guide [A]. ( × 1, hook × 3) • Release the harness guide [A] as shown below. Remove the power pack (Development) [A] with the bracket. ( × 5, hook × 1) Remove the power pack (Development) [A].
  • Page 345 Electrical Components Power Pack (Transfer) Remove the PSU with the bracket. (PSU (AC), PSU (DC)) Disconnect the harness attached to the power pack’s bracket, and then remove the power pack [A] with the bracket. ( × 3, × 1) Removing the Power Pack (Transfer) Alone Remove the PSU with the bracket.
  • Page 346 Electrical Components Disconnect the connectors and pull out the PSU fan [A] with the cover. Remove the cover from the PSU fan [A]. ( × 2) • Install the PSU fan with its label facing the inside of the machine. PCDU Cooling Fan Remove the left cover.
  • Page 347 Electrical Components Remove the PCDU cooling fan [A]. ( × 2, hook × 4) • Install the PCDU cooling fan with its label facing the inside of the machine. Fusing Fan Remove the right rear cover. (Right Rear Cover) Remove the fusing fan [A] with the cover. ( ×...
  • Page 348 Electrical Components Temperature/Humidity Sensor Pull out the paper tray. Remove the front lower cover [A]. ( × 1) Remove the temperature/humidity sensor [A]. ( × 1, × 1) Image Creation Temperature Sensor Remove the toner transport section. (Toner Transport Section)
  • Page 349 Electrical Components Remove the image creation temperature sensor [A] while releasing the harness of the image creation temperature sensor from the harness guide [B]. ( × 1, × 1) Interlock Switches Pull out the paper tray. Remove the front lower cover [A]. ( ×...
  • Page 350 Electrical Components Remove the interlock switch cover [A]. ( × 3) Remove the Interlock switches [A]. ( × each 2) DC Switch Remove the PSU with the bracket. (PSU (AC), PSU (DC)) Remove the DC switch cover [A]. ( × 2, ×...
  • Page 351 Electrical Components Remove the DC switch [A] with the bracket. ( × 2) Remove the DC switch [A]. ( × 1, × 1)
  • Page 352 Service Program Mode 5. System Maintenance Service Program Mode SP Tables See "Appendices" for the following information: • Service Program Mode • SP Tables - SP1-XXX • SP Tables - SP2-XXX • SP Tables - SP3-XXX • SP Tables - SP4-XXX •...
  • Page 353 Firmware Update (SD Card) Firmware Update (SD Card) Overview In order to update the firmware of this machine, it is necessary to download the latest version of firmware on a SD card. Insert the SD card in SD card slot 2 beside the left rear of the controller box. Types of firmware update files, supported update methods: Individual firmware Available...
  • Page 354 Firmware Update (SD Card) Firmware type Firmware location PictBridge Controller Board Controller Board MediaPrint: JPEG Controller Board MediaPrint: TIFF Controller Board Controller Board FONT Controller Board FONT1 Controller Board FONT2 Controller Board Copy apl Smart Operation Panel – CPU board NetworkDocBox Smart Operation Panel –...
  • Page 355 Firmware Update (SD Card) Procedure • A SD card is a precision device, so when you handle an SD card, respect the following. • When the power is switched ON, do not insert or remove a card. • During installation, do not switch the power OFF. •...
  • Page 356 Firmware Update (SD Card) Insert the SD card into SD card slot 2 [A: Lower Slot]. • Check whether the card is properly in the SD card slot. When a SD card is inserted, a click is heard, and it is locked. •...
  • Page 357 Firmware Update (SD Card) Display Contents NEW: Display module number / version information in the card. The upper row corresponds to the module name, the lower row corresponds to the version number. Select the module with the module selection button or 10 key pad operation. The selected module is highlighted, and [Verify] and [Update] are displayed.
  • Page 358 Firmware Update (SD Card) row shows that the module updated last is the printer. (When more than one were updated simultaneously, only the module that was updated last is displayed.) • When Verify has completed normally, the Update done display of the above screen is "Verify done." If "Verify Error"...
  • Page 359 Firmware Update (SD Card) For error codes, refer to the following table: Error Code List Code Contents Solutions • Physical address mapping cannot be performed. Switch the main power supply off and on to try again. • Re-insert the SD card to reboot it. •...
  • Page 360 Firmware Update (SD Card) Code Contents Solutions The wrong card version is downloaded. version in the SD card. • Destination error. Install the correct ROM update data for each A card for the wrong destination is inserted. destination (JPN/ EXP/ OEM) in the SD card. •...
  • Page 361 Firmware Update (SD Card) Code Contents Solutions Administrator Tools has been set to [Prohibit] by an administrator. Amend the setting to [Do not Prohibit] and try again. • The results of the electronic authorization check Install the correct ROM update data in the SD have rejected the update data.
  • Page 362 Firmware Update (SD Card) Code Contents Solutions fails. • Network communication error occurs at the Check that the network is connected correctly. reserved date/time of the package firmware update from the network. • The setting of @Remote is invalid at the Set the setting of @Remote Service in the reserved date/time of the package firmware Administrator Tools to [Do not Prohibit].
  • Page 363 Firmware Update (SD Card) Code Contents Solutions remote firmware update from the network. • Package firmware download from the network Check that the network is connected correctly. fails. • Network communication error occurs at the Check that the network is connected correctly. reserved date/time of the package firmware update from the network.
  • Page 364 Firmware Update (Remote Firmware Update) Firmware Update (Remote Firmware Update) In this machine, software can be updated by remote control using @Remote. Types of firmware update files, supported update methods: SD Card ARFU Individual firmware Available Available Package firmware Available Available Available Available...
  • Page 365 Firmware Update (Smart Firmware Update) Firmware Update (Smart Firmware Update) • A HDD unit must be installed on the machine to enable the SFU or the package firmware update via SD card. Overview Each firmware module (such as System/Copy, Engine, etc) used to be updated individually. However, an all-inclusive firmware package (package_ALL) is now available.
  • Page 366 Firmware Update (Smart Firmware Update) Types of firmware update files, supported update methods: SD Card ARFU Individual firmware Available Available Package firmware Available Available Available Available Immediate Update Enter the [Firmware Update] menu in the SP mode and update the package firmware. •...
  • Page 367 Firmware Update (Smart Firmware Update) Touch [Execute Update]. Touch [YES]. The following display will be displayed. • If the error code E66, which indicates that the download of the firmware has failed, is displayed, implement this procedure from step 1. •...
  • Page 368 Firmware Update (Smart Firmware Update) • When the machine is in the update mode, the automatic update is suspended if a print job is implemented. After the print job is finished, touch [YES] on the display shown with the following picture to restart updating. [Update done] is displayed.
  • Page 369 Firmware Update (Smart Firmware Update) How to Set the Machine to Download Firmware Later (RESERVE) Enter the [Firmware Update] menu in the SP mode and update the package firmware. • The [Firmware Update] button will appear even when a machine is connected to @Remote with a device which does not have an embedded @Remote communicating function.
  • Page 370 Firmware Update (Smart Firmware Update) time/date. • ”When to receive? (1-7)”: The download of the package firmware will begin this number of days before the next visit. Successful Download In the two diagrams below, the firmware is set to be downloaded by the day before the next scheduled visit. In the first diagram, the download is successful on the first try.
  • Page 371 Firmware Update (Smart Firmware Update) How to Check if the Firmware Downloaded with RESERVE Enter the SP mode. Touch [Firmware Update]. Touch [Reserve]. Touch [Reserve and received package information]. Check the information displayed. When the package firmware is downloaded successfully, the details of the download result are displayed as the following picture shows.
  • Page 372 Firmware Update (Smart Firmware Update) • This information will only be displayed if the reserved firmware has already been downloaded. If not, all the data items are indicated with “-”. How to Install Firmware Downloaded with RESERVE Enter the SP mode. Touch [Firmware Update].
  • Page 373 Firmware Update (Smart Firmware Update) Touch [Execute Update]. Check the version of the received package firmware, and then touch [YES]. • Update is started. • If the version of the reserved package in the HDD is older than the latest version, the messages shown in the following picture are displayed.
  • Page 374 Firmware Update (Smart Firmware Update) • The machine will automatically reboot itself. • The figures at the lower right of the display indicate “Number of updated items/ All items to be updated”. Update via SD card Update with an SD card, which is the conventional method, is available if you write the package firmware to the SD card.
  • Page 375 Firmware Update (Smart Firmware Update) • If you copy the package firmware into the conventional “romdata” folder, the update will not work. • Only one version of the package firmware should be copied into the folder. If you copy multiple versions of package firmware to the SD card, the machine will select only one version of the firmware randomly.
  • Page 376 Firmware Update (Smart Firmware Update) When update is completed, “Update done” is displayed. • The figures at the lower right of the display indicate “Number of updated items/ All items to be updated”. Turn the main power switch OFF, and then pull out the SD card from SD card slot 2. Turn the power ON.
  • Page 377 Firmware Update (Auto Remote Firmware Update) Firmware Update (Auto Remote Firmware Update) • Auto remote firmware update (ARFU) requires connection to the Internet. Be sure to get permission from the customer before setting up this feature. Overview By Auto Remote Firmware Update (ARFU), the firmware is updated by checking the global server every 76 hours and downloading the latest package if it is newer than the one installed on the machine.
  • Page 378 Firmware Update (Auto Remote Firmware Update) Included Firmware FaxInfoWidget GWFCU3.8-9(WW) Downloading and Updating Process Downloads the Latest Package The machine checks the server for the latest package version. If the version of the package on the global server is later than that of the package installed on the machine, or if the machine has not downloaded the firmware package, the machine downloads the latest package in the background even when the customer is using the machine.
  • Page 379 Firmware Update (Auto Remote Firmware Update) already been downloaded. If the judgement timing is in the range of the update prohibited time or day set with SP or WIM, the machine will retry the update after 76 hours. If the machine is in use when the judgement process runs, the process is retried. Retry is done up to three times every hour (can be changed with SP) and if the machine is in use for all three retries, the machine will retry the update after 76 hours...
  • Page 380 Firmware Update (Auto Remote Firmware Update) Situations judged as machine in use Situations judged as machine in use When the control panel is used within 30 seconds During firmware update While firmware update is disabled While printing (copy, printer, fax, re-printing via network) While scanning (copy, scanner, fax) Retrieving image data via network While initial setting (User Tools settings) or SP is being set...
  • Page 381 Firmware Update (Auto Remote Firmware Update) When the "Cancel" button is selected, the machine will run the "Retry update" process. When the device update and three retries in recovery mode both fail, it is determined as a device defect and will display an SC for the defective device.
  • Page 382 Firmware Update (Auto Remote Firmware Update) Controller Board Operation Panel For example, when the update process is cancelled while updating the first module of the operation panel, the machine will reboot when all modules in the operation panel have been updated. The firmware contents included in the package can be referred to in the release note in the SERES release of the package.
  • Page 383 Firmware Update (Auto Remote Firmware Update) SP Number Selection Overview Def. not be prohibited.) SP5-886-115 Even when the update function is disabled, downloading the package is 0: OFF 1: ON allowed. The downloaded package can be used with SFU. SP5-886-116 Display Displays when the latest package check will run.
  • Page 384 Firmware Update (Auto Remote Firmware Update) Numbers set for the result history for SP7-520-051 to 060 Result Description Downloading with SFU Cannot download or update because the machine is now downloading the package for SFU. HDD not installed Cannot download or update because the machine has no HDD. Updating with SFU Cannot download or update because the machine is being updated with SFU.
  • Page 385 Firmware Update (Auto Remote Firmware Update) Result Description Update failed Update was started but failed. Update deemed completed Update was cancelled after the process was initiated because a user selected “Cancel”. There is no need to resume the update due to one of the following reasons: •...
  • Page 386 Updating JavaVM Updating JavaVM Creating an SD Card for Updating Download the update modules from Firmware Download Center. As one of the model modules, "Java VM v12 UpdateTool" is available for download. (The version differs depending on the model.) Unzip the downloaded file. Copy the whole "sdk" folder to the root of the SD card directly below. •...
  • Page 387 Updating JavaVM List of Error Messages Update results are output as a text file on the SD card called "sdkjversionup.log" in the "\sdk \update" folder. Result File contents Description of the output Success script file = /mnt/sd0/sdk/update/bootscript Boot script path 2012/08/22 17:57:47 start Boot scripts processing start time 2012/08/22 17:59:47 end SUCCESS...
  • Page 388 Updating JavaVM Error Message Cause Remedy Error. Copy Error! Put Error! *1 Error, not normally If you cannot uninstall it, implement escalation Copy Error! *1 expected to occur stating the "model name, application configuration, SMC sheet (SP5-990-006/024/025), Delete Error! and error file." [XXXXX] is an unsupported command.
  • Page 389 Capturing the Device Logs Capturing the Device Logs Overview With this feature, you can save device logs that are stored in the machine (HDD or operation panel) on an SD card. It allows the Customer Engineer to save and retrieve error information for analysis. The Capturing Log feature saves device logs for the following four.
  • Page 390 Capturing the Device Logs Type Storage Timing Destination (maximum storage capacity) • Operation panel log Memory in the operation When an error related to the operation panel occurs. panel. • Device logs are not saved in the following conditions: • While erasing all memory •...
  • Page 391 Capturing the Device Logs • e.g.: At around 8:00 am on March 10, an engine stall occurred. The operation panel does not respond. Turn the main power supply off / on. • Analysis of the device log is effective for problems caused by the software. Analysis of the device log is not valid for the selection of defective parts or problems caused by hardware.
  • Page 392 Capturing the Device Logs Collectable Information and/or Logs SP5-858-142 Controller log SP5-858-143 Engine log SP5-858-144 Operation panel log SP5-858-145 FCU log SP5-992-001 SMC After executing the SP for copying the information and/or logs, a confirmation screen will appear. To proceed with obtaining the information and/or logs, tap "Execute" •...
  • Page 393 Capturing the Device Logs Wait for the information and/or logs to be copied to the SD card. After a message stating that the process has completed appears on the operation panel, confirm that the LED light next to the SD card slot is not flashing and then remove the SD card. 10.
  • Page 394 Capturing the Device Logs Specify the date that the problem occurred and the number of days to download the logs. If the fax destinations need to be included in the fax information, set "On" as "Obtain Fax Destination(s) Information". Then click "Download". •...
  • Page 395 Capturing the Device Logs After a while, the open-or-save dialog will appear. Specify where to download and save the file. • The debug logs are saved with the following file names. These names are the same as the files downloaded with SD card. The device logs are saved with the following file names.
  • Page 396 NVRAM Data Upload/Download NVRAM Data Upload/Download Uploading Content of NVRAM to an SD card Do the following procedure to upload SP code settings from NVRAM to an SD card. • This data should always be uploaded to an SD card before the NVRAM is replaced. •...
  • Page 397 NVRAM Data Upload/Download NVRAM\<serial number>.NV Here is an example with Serial Number "K5000017114": NVRAM\K5000017114.NV In order to prevent an error during the download, be sure to mark the SD card that holds the uploaded data with the number of the machine from which the data was uploaded. •...
  • Page 398 Address Book Upload/Download Address Book Upload/Download Information List The following information is possible to be uploaded and downloaded. Information • • Registration No. Select Title • • User Code Folder • • E-mail Local Authentication • • Protection Code Folder Authentication •...
  • Page 399 Address Book Upload/Download Install the SD card into the SD card slot 2 (lower) [A] (for service use). Turn ON the power. Enter the SP mode. Do SP5-846-051 (Backup All Addr Book). Exit the SP mode, and then turn OFF the power. 10.
  • Page 400 SMC List Card Save Function SMC List Card Save Function Overview The SMC List Card Save (SP Text Mode) function is used to save the SMC list as CSV files to the SD card inserted into the operation panel SD card slot. •...
  • Page 401 SMC List Card Save Function Detail No. SMC Categories to Save Scanner SP Scanner User Program SDK/J Summary SDK/J Application Info Printer SP Smart Operation Panel SP Smart Operation Panel UP Press [EXECUTE]. Press [EXECUTE] again to start. Press [CANCEL] to cancel the saving. “It is executing it”...
  • Page 402 SMC List Card Save Function 10. Wait for 2 to 3 minutes until “Completed” is shown. • The SMC list saving may take from 2 to 3 minutes to complete. • Press [CANCEL] to abort executing. 11. Press [Exit] to exit from SP mode. File Names of the Saved SMC Lists The SMC list data saved on the SD card will be named automatically.
  • Page 403 SMC List Card Save Function Error Messages SMC List Card Save error message: • Failed: FACTOR: Read-only file system, No space left on device. If an error occurs, pressing “Exit” will cause the device to discard the job and return to the ready state.
  • Page 404 UP/SP Data Import/Export UP/SP Data Import/Export UP Data Import/Export Data that can be Imported and Exported • Copier / Document Server Features • Printer Features • Scanner Features • Facsimile Features • Browser Features • Extended Feature Settings • Program (Document Server) •...
  • Page 405 UP/SP Data Import/Export Insert an SD card into the media slot on the side of the control panel. Log in from the control panel as an administrator with all privileges. Press [User Tools] icon > [Machine Features] > [System Settings]. Press [Administrator Tools].
  • Page 406 UP/SP Data Import/Export Import device information saved on an SD card. Insert an SD card into the media slot on the side of the control panel. Log in from the control panel as an administrator with all privileges. [User Tools] icon > [Machine Features] > [System Settings]. Press [Administrator Tools].
  • Page 407 UP/SP Data Import/Export Insert an SD card into the media slot on the side of the control panel. Enter SP mode. Do SP5-749-001 (Import/Export: Export). Select “Target” SP settings (System/Printer/Fax/Scanner) to be exported. Select “Option” settings (Unique/Secret). Item Specification Note Unique Unique information of the machine is Unique information that can be updated included in the exported file if you select...
  • Page 408 UP/SP Data Import/Export • If you push the "Encryption" key, you Type the arbitrary password using the soft can export secret information. keyboard • Can enter up to 32 characters Press [Execute]. Press [OK]. • If data export fails, the details of the error can be viewed in the log. Importing Device Information Import device information saved on an SD card.
  • Page 409 UP/SP Data Import/Export If you cannot solve the problem or do not know how to solve it after checking the code, note down the error log entry, then contact your supervisor. Result Code Cause Solutions 2 (INVALID A file import was attempted between Import files exported from the same model REQUEST) different models or machines with different...
  • Page 410 UP/SP Data Import/Export Result Code Cause Solutions The setting does not exist in the system. 5. INTERLOCK ERROR The setting cannot be changed because of the system status or interlocking with other specified settings. 6. OTHER ERROR The setting cannot be changed for some other reason.
  • Page 411 Test Pattern Printing Test Pattern Printing Printing Test pattern: SP2-109 Some of these test patterns are used for copy image adjustments but most are used primarily for design testing. • Do not operate the machine until the test pattern is printed out completely. Otherwise, an SC occurs. Enter the SP mode and select SP2-109-003.
  • Page 412 Card Save Function Card Save Function Overview Card Save: • The Card Save function is used to save print jobs received by the printer on an SD card with no print output. Card Save mode is toggled using printer Bit Switch #1 bit number 4. Card Save will remain enabled until the SD card becomes full, or until all file names have been used.
  • Page 413 Card Save Function the "List/Test Print" menu. Press [Exit] to exit SP Mode. Press [User Tools] icon > [Machine Features]. Press [Printer Features]. 10. Card Save (Add) and Card Save (New) should be displayed on the screen. Select Card Save (Add) or Card Save (New).
  • Page 414 Card Save Function 11. Press [OK] and then exit the "User Tools" menu. 12. Press [Printer (Classic)] icon. 13. "Card Save" is be displayed in the top left of the display panel. 14. Send a job to the printer. The Communicating light should start blinking. 15.
  • Page 415 Self-Diagnostic Mode 6. Troubleshooting Self-Diagnostic Mode Service Call Conditions The ‘SC Table’ section shows the SC codes for controller errors and other errors. The latter are put into four types. The type is determined by their reset procedures. The table shows the classification of the SC codes. Type Display How to reset...
  • Page 416 Self-Diagnostic Mode Type Display How to reset SC call or SC alarm in customer support system SC). Alarm count and alarm only if recurrence • When an ordinary SC (type D) is generated, an automatic reboot is performed. When an event is reported by the customer support system, even in the event of an ordinary SC, reboot is not performed.
  • Page 417 Self-Diagnostic Mode Until automatic reboot • Reset key (Reboot key) Key to perform reboot # Cancel key is not displayed. • Turn on spanner LED (same as when an SC is generated). Operation during SC reboot • Timing of SC reboot When @Remote is enabled, and when a NRS alarm*1 is not generated, the corresponding SC is the object of an automatic reboot.
  • Page 418 Self-Diagnostic Mode SC Manual Reboot When the automatic reboot is disabled in SP5-875-001 (SC automatic reboot setting), user reboot the machine manually. See the flowchart below.
  • Page 419 Self-Diagnostic Mode...
  • Page 420 SC1xx: Scanning SC1xx: Scanning Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC101-01 D LED error The peak white level is less than the prescribed value. This SC is detected when the machine adjusts the LED’s light intensity or before just scanning.
  • Page 421 SC1xx: Scanning Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC102-00 D LED intensity adjustment error The peak white level cannot be in the prescribed value even though adjusting several times. This SC is detected when the machine adjusts the LED’s light intensity. •...
  • Page 422 SC1xx: Scanning SC No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) a specified number of adjustments. • Loose connector • Defective CIS. • Damaged harness • Dirty or incorrect white plate • Defective BiCU Check if the SC occurs by turning the power OFF then ON. If the SC occurs again, do the following steps.
  • Page 423 SC1xx: Scanning Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) • Motor driver error • Defective motor • Defective HP Sensor • Disconnected connectors or damaged harness • Timing belt, pulley, wires or carriage failure Check if the SC occurs by turning the power OFF then ON. If the SC occurs again, do the following steps.
  • Page 424 SC1xx: Scanning Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) • Defective scanner motor • Dirty or incorrect mirror and/or lens • Dirty or incorrect white plate Check if the SC occurs by turning the power OFF then ON. If the SC occurs again, do the following steps.
  • Page 425 SC1xx: Scanning Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Reconnect the connectors between the CIS and BiCU (FFC). Replace the CIS. Replace the BiCU. Replace the harness (FFC). Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC152-00 D White level correction error: rear side The automatic adjustment has failed to correct the white level (rear side) to the permissible range.
  • Page 426 SC1xx: Scanning Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC161-20 D BiCU error (DRAM initialization failure) The DRAM initialization flow is not completed successfully. This SC is detected when: the main power is turned on and the machine returns from the energy saver mode.
  • Page 427 SC2xx: Exposure SC2xx: Exposure Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC202-01 D Polygon motor error 0: ON timeout: Bk, Cy SC202-03 D Polygon motor error 1: ON timeout: Ma, Ye Polygon mirror motor cannot rotate correctly. This SC is detected when the polygon mirror motor starts rotating, or its rotating speed is changed.
  • Page 428 SC2xx: Exposure Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Check the harness between LD unit and BiCU. Check CN300 (a connector with five pins) for the polygon mirror motor from the PSU. There is no problem if your multimeter indicates 24±2V. Replace the LD unit (Polygon mirror motor).
  • Page 429 SC2xx: Exposure Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) • Defective LD unit (Synchronizing mechanism or LDB failure) • BiCU failure (Damaged laser ASIC) • Disconnected LDB harness Cycle the power off/on. Check for condensation on the LDB. Check the harness between LDB (Synchronizing mechanism) and BiCU. Replace the LD unit.
  • Page 430 SC2xx: Exposure Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC240-01 LD error: Bk SC240-02 LD error: Cy SC240-03 LD error: Ma SC240-04 LD error: Ye • The LD current is more than the prescribed current during emitting light. • LD driver cannot be initialized correctly. •...
  • Page 431 SC2xx: Exposure Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Replace the harness between LDB and BiCU. Replace the interlock switch. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC285-00 MUSIC error The results of MUSIC pattern reading failed 4 times. The ID sensor cannot detect the MUSIC pattern Color registration error is larger than the specified value Refer to "When SC285-00 (MUSIC error) Is...
  • Page 432 SC2xx: Exposure Countermeasure (1): Large drifting An abnormal value may be contained in the SP where the MUSIC corrected result is saved. Execute SP2-180-001 (Line Pos. Adj.: Clear Color Regist.). Execute SP2-111-004 (Forced Line Position: Adj. Mode d). Check SP2-194-007 (MUSIC Execution Result: Execution Result). Countermeasure (2): MUSIC pattern density Error Execute MUSIC and check the result.
  • Page 433 SC2xx: Exposure Check the harness and connector for ID sensor. Replace the ID sensor. Replace the BiCU. Countermeasure (5): ID Sensor Shutter Defective Check if there is no problem concerning the mechanism (interference or deformation). Execute SP5-804-021 (OUTPUT Check: TM sensor Shutter Solenoid) to operate the ID sensor shutter solenoid to check opening/closing of the shutter.
  • Page 434 SC3xx: Image Processing SC3xx: Image Processing Image Processing 1: Charge and Development Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC312-01 D Charge roller feed back voltage error: Bk SC312-02 D Charge roller feed back voltage error: Cy SC312-03 D Charge roller feed back voltage error: Ma SC312-04 D Charge roller feed back voltage error: Ye The feedback voltage of the charge AC for each color is 0.15V or less for consecutive 200ms...
  • Page 435 SC3xx: Image Processing Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) • Replace the PCDU. • Replace the development motor (CMY). Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC325-01 D Development motor (CMY) error (When motor is deactivated) The motor LOCK signal is not detected for more than 2 seconds while the motor START signal is OFF.
  • Page 436 SC3xx: Image Processing Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) • Replace the drum motor (CMY) (SC397) • Reconnect the connector for the drum motor. • Replace the harness for the drum motor. • Replace the BiCU. • Replace the PCDU. Image Processing 2: Drum Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
  • Page 437 SC3xx: Image Processing Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) threshold for the specified consecutive times. • TD sensor connector is disconnected To check if the issue is resolved: Cycle the power off/on. Feed one sheet of paper. Check Vt with SP3-210-001 through -004. Check if Vt is higher than the upper threshold (specified in SP3-211-002).
  • Page 438 SC3xx: Image Processing Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) • Check the connection of the TD sensor connector. • Check if the TD sensor harness is connected firmly. • Replace the TD sensor if any abnormality is found. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC370-00 D ID sensor calibration error...
  • Page 439 SC4xx: Image Processing SC4xx: Image Processing Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC442-00 D Image transfer belt contact motor error ITB contact HP sensor cannot detect the sensor feeler condition within a specified time even when the ITB contact motor rotates. •...
  • Page 440 SC4xx: Image Processing Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) First, cycle the main power off/on to check if this SC occurs again. If this SC reoccurs, do the following: Remove and install the PCDU again to make sure that the PCDU is firmly set. Cycle the main power off/on to check if this SC occurs again.
  • Page 441 SC4xx: Image Processing Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) • Transfer unit not installed firmly • This is a logging SC (No action required). Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC497-00 C Image creation temperature sensor error The thermistor output of the temperature sensor is not within the prescribed range (more than 0.5 V to less than 3.0 V).
  • Page 442 SC5xx: Paper Feed and Fusing SC5xx: Paper Feed and Fusing Paper feed Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC501-00 B 1st paper tray lift motor malfunction This SC occurs if no paper is detected within the prescribed time when the tray is set correctly, and the tray lift motor starts rotating CW or CCW.
  • Page 443 SC5xx: Paper Feed and Fusing Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) If this condition occurs three consecutive times, this SC is generated. • Disconnected or defective connectors of the bypass lift clutch • Disconnected or defective bypass lift sensor •...
  • Page 444 SC5xx: Paper Feed and Fusing Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Replace the transport motor. Fusing Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC530-00 D Fusing heater exhaust fan motor error SC531-00 D Development cooling fan motor error SC532-00 D Writing cooling fan motor error SC533-00 D PSU fan motor error...
  • Page 445 SC5xx: Paper Feed and Fusing Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Replace the fusing motor. Check or replace the harness. Replace the BiCU. Replace the fusing unit. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC540-01 Fusing motor error (While the motor is OFF) The motor LOCK signal is not detected for 2 seconds while the motor is OFF.
  • Page 446 SC5xx: Paper Feed and Fusing Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) when: • The machine starts warming up. • The machine returns from energy saver mode. • The fusing lamp is activated. • Dirty or deformed thermopile lenses • Input voltage out of specification (out of warranty) •...
  • Page 447 SC5xx: Paper Feed and Fusing Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC543-00 A Fusing thermopile overheat (software error) Fusing thermopile detects a temperature of 240 degrees C or more for 10 seconds after the relay is activated. • Triac short •...
  • Page 448 SC5xx: Paper Feed and Fusing Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Replace the fusing lamp. Replace the fusing thermopile. Replace the BiCU. Replace the PSU (AC) Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC547-01 D Zero cross error: fusing lamp relay contact welding Zero cross signal is detected when the fusing relay is deactivated.
  • Page 449 SC5xx: Paper Feed and Fusing Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Replace the PSU (AC). Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC549-00 D Fusing Center Low Temperature After passing 60 seconds when FGATE is ON, thermopile detects a temperature of -100 degrees C from the compensated target temperature for consecutive 60 seconds.
  • Page 450 SC5xx: Paper Feed and Fusing Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC559-00 A Consecutive fusing jam The paper jam counter for the fusing unit reaches three consecutive times (the fusing exit sensor does not detect the paper). • Paper jam in the fusing unit. Replace the separation plate.
  • Page 451 SC5xx: Paper Feed and Fusing Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Replace the fusing lamp. Replace the thermistor. Replace the BiCU. Replace the PSU (AC). Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC563-00 A Pressure roller overheat (software error): Center Pressure roller thermistor (center) detects a temperature of 248 degrees C 10 times after the fusing relay is ON.
  • Page 452 SC5xx: Paper Feed and Fusing Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) • Loose connector Check the input voltage and reconnect the power cord. Reconnect the connectors between the fusing drawer connector, the BiCU, and the pressure roller thermistor. Replace the thermistor. Replace the fusing unit.
  • Page 453 SC5xx: Paper Feed and Fusing Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) • Replace the fusing unit if all the above steps cannot resolve the issue. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC574-00 A Pressure roller (rear) overheat (hardware error) Pressure roller thermistor (rear) detects a temperature of 248 degrees C.
  • Page 454 SC5xx: Paper Feed and Fusing Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) consecutive seconds when the fusing lamp is activated. • Thermistor disconnection • Loose connector Reconnect the connectors between the fusing unit, fusing drawer connector, and BiCU. Replace the thermistor. Replace the fusing unit.
  • Page 455 SC5xx: Paper Feed and Fusing Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC594-00 Pressure roller thermistor (front) high temperature (hardware error) Pressure roller thermistor (front) detects a temperature of 248 degrees C. • Shorted triac • Defective BiCU • Defective fusing control system Reconnect the connectors between the fusing unit, fusing drawer connector, and BiCU.
  • Page 456 SC6xx: Communication SC6xx: Communication Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC622-00 D 1st paper tray communication error While the BiCU communicates with an optional unit, an SC code is displayed if one of following conditions occurs. • The BiCU receives the break signal which is generated by the peripherals only just after the main power is turned on.
  • Page 457 SC6xx: Communication Rev 01/14/2019 Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC637-02 Tracking Information notification error (Management server error) Tracking information was lost. Communication with tracking management server failed. • Network error • tracking management server error • Tracking SDK application error Cycle the main power off and on.
  • Page 458 SC6xx: Communication Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC650-01 C Remote service modem communication error (Dialup authentication failure) • An error related to communication (dialup connection, modem board etc.) using the RC Gate Type M was detected or an error that prevents RC Gate operation was detected at power on.
  • Page 459 SC6xx: Communication Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) referenced using SP). • SP settings invalid • Modem connector disconnected • Modem board disconnected • Wireless LAN card disconnected The line is not supported and nothing can be done. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC650-13 C Remote Service Modem Communication Error (RC Gate Type M was installed but modem is...
  • Page 460 SC6xx: Communication Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) • If a modem board is attached, remove it. • Check if wired/wireless LAN works. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Sc651-01 Illegal Remote Service Dial-up (Chat program parameter error) An unexpected error occurred when RC Gate Type M dialed up the NRS Center.
  • Page 461 SC6xx: Communication Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Clear the RC Gate install status, write the common certificate, and then begin installation again. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC664-01 D ASIC – SRAM Communication error • When the machine starts or returns from the energy saver mode, a connection error signal between ASIC and SRAM device is detected.
  • Page 462 SC6xx: Communication Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) • Cycle the power off/on. • Replace the BiCU. SC667-40 D ASIC operation mode setting error • BiCU failure • Cycle the power off/on. • Replace the BiCU. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC669-00 D EEPROM error The TD sensor cannot be recovered after retrying three times for EEPROM communication...
  • Page 463 SC6xx: Communication Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC670-02 D Engine is down when machine starts up (SC reboot can not be performed) (* See “When SC670 Is Displayed” below) Machine-down was detected after the /ENGRDY signal was not asserted. The engine board was reset at an unexpected time Check the connection between the engine board and the controller board.
  • Page 464 SC6xx: Communication Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) • Controller board defective • Operation panel connector loose, broken or defective • Controller late • Cycle the main power off and on. • Check the connection of the controller board. •...
  • Page 465 SC6xx: Communication Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC672-13 D Controller start up error The operation panel detects that the controller is down due to other reason shown in SC672-10, SC672-11, and SC672-12. • Controller stalled • Board installed incorrectly •...
  • Page 466 SC6xx: Communication Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) • Disconnected ID chip • No ID chip • Noise Check the SC’s branch number (-** part) and do the above steps for the corresponding color. If the last digit of the SC’s branch number (-**) is: 1 or 6, then do the above steps for K 2 or 7, then do the above steps for M 3 or 8, then do the above steps for C...
  • Page 467 SC6xx: Communication Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Replace the PCDU (if the TD sensor works incorrectly) Replace the harness between the BiCU and the TD sensor. Replace the BiCU. Check the SC’s branch number (-** part) and do the above steps for the corresponding color. •...
  • Page 468 SC7xx: Peripherals SC7xx: Peripherals Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC790-00 Too many paper tray units An attachment identification code is other than “01H” or ”02H”. • Number of paper tray units is more than the machine specification. 1. Reduce the number of paper tray units within the machine specification.
  • Page 469 SC8xx: Overall System SC8xx: Overall System Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC816-** [0x0000] Energy save I/O subsystem error SC816-01 Subsystem error SC816-02 Sysarch (LPUX_GET_PORT_INFO) error SC816-03 Transition to STR was denied. SC816-04 Interrupt in kernel communication driver SC816-05 Preparation for transition to STR failed.
  • Page 470 SC8xx: Overall System Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) the following steps. Check if the SC reoccurs by cycling the power after each step. Update the "System/Copy" firmware and the other system firmware to the latest version. Disable the STR shift function with SP5-191-001 (Power Str Set). Replace the controller board.
  • Page 471 SC8xx: Overall System Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) device defective) • The code data saved to memory was broken for an unexpected reason. (Memory device defective) • ASIC defective • Data other than code data was unzipped due to a software malfunction. •...
  • Page 472 SC8xx: Overall System Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) [XXXX]: Detailed error code [0001] TLB change (store) exception error [0002] TLB miss (load) exception error [0003] TLB miss (store) exception error [0004] Read address exception error [0005] Write address exception error [0006] Instruction bus exception error [0007]...
  • Page 473 SC8xx: Overall System Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC820-00 Self-diagnostics error: CPU [XXXX]: Detailed error code [0601] Read address exception error [0602] Write address exception error [0605] System call exception error [0606] Break exception error [0607] Invalid instruction exception error [0609] Overflow exception error Exception does not occur though executing exception by intention.
  • Page 474 SC8xx: Overall System Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) [0612] ASIC interrupt error Interrupt occurs in an ASIC. • ASIC device error • Peripherals device error • Replace the controller board • Replace the connected controller option with a new one Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC820-00...
  • Page 475 SC8xx: Overall System Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) [0703] Instruction uncache error [0704] Instruction cache hit error [0705] Instruction cache clear error Data in the instruction cache which is set in the primary instruction cache of the CPU is different from the contents of the pre-set Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
  • Page 476 SC8xx: Overall System Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) [080A] TLB modify error Error occurred during TLB checking. CPU device error Replace the controller board Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC820-00 Self-diagnostics error: CPU [XXXX]: Detailed error code [4002] Single precision arithmetic error [4003]...
  • Page 477 SC8xx: Overall System Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) • Connection error between PCI I / F of the controller ASIC and video bridge device ASIC. Replace the controller board [50A2] Video bridge device (ASIC) register error The CPU detects the video bridge device, but detects error data from the video bridge device.
  • Page 478 SC8xx: Overall System Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Result of the issuance of diagnostic command is error. Defective HDD device Replace the HDD device. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC823-00 Self-diagnostics error: NIC [XXXX]: Detailed error code [6101] MAC address check sum error The result of the MAC address check sum does not match the check sum stored in ROM.
  • Page 479 SC8xx: Overall System Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC827-00 D Self-diagnostic error: RAM [XXXX]: Detailed error code [0201] Resident memory verification error Error detected during a write/verify check for the standard RAM*1 on controller board. *1 Standard RAM on controller (2GB) in this machine is divided into the resident RAM (1GB) and the optional RAM (1GB).
  • Page 480 SC8xx: Overall System Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC833-00 Self-diagnostic error: Engine I/F ASIC [XXXX]: Detailed error code [0F30] Engine I/F ASIC detection error ASIC (Mandolin) for engine control could not be detected. ASIC (Mandolin) error Replace the Engine I/F board (mother board).
  • Page 481 SC8xx: Overall System Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) The loopback connector is connected but check results is an error. • ASIC device error • IEEE1284 connector error • Centronic loopback connector is defective Replace the controller board. [1120] Loopback connector not detected Centronic loopback connector is not connected for detailed self-diagnostic test.
  • Page 482 SC8xx: Overall System Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) • Defective EEPROM Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC841-00 EEPROM read data error Mirrored data of the EEPROM is different from the original data in EEPROM. Data in the EEPROM is overwritten for some reason. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC842-01 D...
  • Page 483 SC8xx: Overall System Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC cannot be recovered by replacing the controller board. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC853-00 Bluetooth device connection error The Bluetooth hardware (USB type) was connected after the machine was turned on. The Bluetooth hardware (USB type) was connected after the machine was turned on.
  • Page 484 SC8xx: Overall System Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC858-00 Data encryption conversion error (Key Setting Error) A serious error occurred during an attempt to update the encryption key. • USB Flash, other data, corrupted • Communication error caused by electrostatic noise •...
  • Page 485 SC8xx: Overall System Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC859-00 B Data encryption conversion HDD conversion error When the data encryption key was updated, HDD data was converted, but not correctly. Image displayed at conversion only (this SC is not displayed), but SC is displayed after machine is cycled off/on.
  • Page 486 SC8xx: Overall System Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC859-10 B Data encryption conversion HDD conversion error (Data read/write command error) When the data encryption key was updated, HDD data was converted, but not correctly. Image displayed at conversion only (this SC is not displayed), but SC is displayed after machine is cycled off/on.
  • Page 487 SC8xx: Overall System Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC863 occurs during the HDD reading and defective sectors are registered up to 101. • Format the HDD (SP5-832: HDD formatting). • Replace the HDD. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC863-01 D HDD data read failure The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally.
  • Page 488 SC8xx: Overall System Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC864-00 D HD data CRC error During HD operation, the HD cannot respond to a CRC error query. Data transfer did not execute normally while data was being written to the HD. HD defective Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
  • Page 489 SC8xx: Overall System Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Replace the HDD. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC865-02 to HDD access error During HDD operation, the HDD returned an error. The HDD returned an error that does not constitute SC863 (bad sector) or SC864 (CRC error).
  • Page 490 SC8xx: Overall System Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) The SD card was removed while the machine is on. An application SD card has been removed from the slot (mount point of /mnt/sd2). Cycle the main power off and on. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC868-**...
  • Page 491 SC8xx: Overall System Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC870-00 B Address Book data error (Anytime: Address Book Error.) SC870-01 B Address Book data error (On startup: Media required for storing the Address Book is missing.) SC870-02 B Address Book data error (On startup: encryption is configured but the module required for encryption (DESS) is missing.) SC870-03 B Address Book data error (Initialization: Failed to generate a file to store internal Address...
  • Page 492 SC8xx: Overall System Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) conversion between plaintext and encrypted text.) SC870-52 B Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Failed to convert from plaintext to encrypted text.) SC870-53 B Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Failed to convert from encrypted text to plaintext.) SC870-54 B Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Detected data inconsistency when reading the...
  • Page 493 SC8xx: Overall System Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC871-00 FCU error An error occurred when FCS detects FCU defective. • Time-out error • Abnormal Parameter • Cycle the main power off and on. • Update the firmware if more recent firmware was released. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC872-00 B...
  • Page 494 SC8xx: Overall System Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC874-12 Delete all error (Delete data area) : No designated partition SC874-13 Delete all error (Delete data area) : No device file SC874-14 Delete all error (Delete data area) : Start option error SC874-15 Delete all error (Delete data area) : No designated sector number SC874-16...
  • Page 495 SC8xx: Overall System Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) • Damaged log data file. • Log encryption is enabled but encryption module is not installed. • Inconsistency of encryption key between NV-RAM and HDD. • Software bug. Try the SC876-01 to -99 solutions listed below. If it is not solved, do the following steps (for when only an HDD is replaced): Disconnect the HDD and turn on the main power.
  • Page 496 SC8xx: Overall System Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) • Disable the log encryption setting. • Initialize LCS memory (SP5801-019). • Initialize the HDD (SP5-832-004). Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC876-04 D Log Data Error 4 An error was detected in the handling of the log data at power on or during machine operation.
  • Page 497 SC8xx: Overall System Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) • Data Overwrite Security option SD card has been removed. • If the SD card is broken, prepare a new Data Overwrite Security option SD card and replace the NVRAM. •...
  • Page 498 SC8xx: Overall System Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC878-20 Random number test error An error was detected when a random number table was generated during a self-test. TPM is defective • Turn the main power OFF/ON. • Replace the controller board if the SC occurs again. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC878-21 D...
  • Page 499 SC8xx: Overall System Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) • Replace the hardware. In the case of a software error • Cycle the main power off and on. • Try updating the firmware.
  • Page 500 SC9xx: Others SC9xx: Others Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC900-00 Electrical total counter error The total counter contains data that is not a number. • NVRAM incorrect type • NVRAM defective or corrupted • Unexpected error from external source •...
  • Page 501 SC9xx: Others Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) • HDD defective • Power loss while data was writing to HDD • Software bug See the table and the procedure below. Here is a list of HDD status codes: Display Meaning (-1) HDD not connected...
  • Page 502 SC9xx: Others Do SP5-832-11, and cycle the main power OFF/ON. Procedure 3 If “Procedure 2” is not the solution for the problem, do SP5-832-001 (HDD Formatting - All) Cycle the machine off/on. • SP5-832-001 erases all document and address book data on the hard disks. Consult with the customer before you do this SP code.
  • Page 503 SC9xx: Others Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC992-00 Undefined SC issued An SC, that is not controlled by the system, occurred. • An SC for the previous model was used mistakenly, etc. • Basically a software bug. Cycle the main power OFF/ON. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC994-00 C...
  • Page 504 SC9xx: Others Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) • Check whether downloaded applications are correctly configured. • Replace the Controller Board.
  • Page 505 Process Control Error Conditions Process Control Error Conditions Developer Initialization Result SP-3-014-001 (Developer Initialization Result) Result Description Possible Causes/Action Successfully Developer initialization is completed successfully completed. • Forced Developer initialization was forcibly A cover was opened or the main switch termination terminated.
  • Page 506 Process Control Error Conditions SP3-012-001 to -010 (Process Control Execute Result) Result Description Possible Causes/Action Successfully completed Process control self-check successfully Check the Vsg adjustment. See the completed. "Vsg Adjustment Result" following this table. • Vt error Vt maximum or minimum error is Defective development unit detected.
  • Page 507 Process Control Error Conditions Result Description Possible Causes/Action Minimum Gamma < 0.15 too low. • Hardware defective. Same as 53 Replace the toner supply pump unit. • Vk error: Maximum Vk is out of range. ID sensor pattern density is 150 <...
  • Page 508 Process Control Error Conditions Result Description Possible Causes/Action Check the connection. Replace the BICU board. • ID sensor output ID sensor output is more than "Voffset Defective ID sensor • error Threshold" (SP3-324-004) Poor connection • Defective BICU Replace the ID sensor. Check the connection.
  • Page 509 Troubleshooting Guide Troubleshooting Guide Line Position Adjustment When there are color registration errors on the output, do the line position adjustment as follows. Test Do SP2-111-003 (Mode c: rough adjustment). Use SP2-194-007 to check if the result of the line position adjustment is correct (0: Completed successfully, 1: Not completed).
  • Page 510 Troubleshooting Guide Test pattern check Possible cause/Countermeasure Replace the BiCU. After Executing SP2-111-003 • Result: "1" in SP2-194-007 • One of results: "5" (Out of adjustable range) in SP2-194-010, -011, -012, -013 Test pattern check Possible cause/Countermeasure • The main scan registrations of M, C, Y, K are shifted by more than Defective laser unit •...
  • Page 511 Troubleshooting Guide Test pattern check Possible cause/Countermeasure Replace the BiCU. Replace the laser optics housing unit. After Executing SP2-111-003 • Result: "1" in SP2-194-007 • Result: "0" in SP2-194-010, -011, -012, -013 Test pattern check Possible cause/Countermeasure Do SP2-111-001 or -002. After Executing SP2-111-001 •...
  • Page 512 Troubleshooting Guide Test pattern check Possible cause/Countermeasure Replace the laser optics housing unit. Replace the BiCU. • The sub scan registrations of M, C, Y are shifted by more No defective component • than ±1.4mm from the sub scan registration of K. Defective image transfer belt •...
  • Page 513 Troubleshooting Guide Test pattern check Possible cause/Countermeasure Do the forced process control (SP3-011-001) or supply some toner (SP3-030-xxx). • The main scan registration is shifted, but only at the Defective ID sensor at center • central area of the image on the output. Deformed center area on the image transfer belt •...
  • Page 514 Troubleshooting Guide Test pattern check Possible cause/Countermeasure • Drum phase adjustment error Reinstall or replace the PCDU. Check or replace the drive unit. Problem at Regular Intervals Image problems may appear at regular intervals that depend on the circumference of certain components. The following diagram shows the possible symptoms (black or white dots at regular intervals).
  • Page 515 Troubleshooting Guide Symptom Possible cause Necessary actions All the paper is black. Incorrectly installed PCDU Install the PCDU correctly. Defective PCDU Replace the PCDU. Defective HVPS Replace the HVPS. Defective laser unit Replace the laser unit. Defective BiCU Replace the BiCU. Defective main board Replace the main board.
  • Page 516 Troubleshooting Guide Interval Possible cause Necessary actions At intervals of 75.4 mm (2.96 inches) Defective OPC drum Replace the PCDU. At intervals of 78.5 mm (3.09 inches) Defective pressure roller Replace the pressure roller or fusing unit. At intervals of 78.5 mm (3.09 inches) Defective fusing belt Replace the fusing unit.
  • Page 517 Troubleshooting Guide Partial CMY Color Dots Symptom Possible cause Necessary actions Unexpected dots of the same color appear at Defective PCDU Replace the PCDU. irregular intervals. Defective image transfer Replace the image transfer belt unit belt unit. Defective fusing unit Replace the fusing unit.
  • Page 518 Troubleshooting Guide Symptom Possible cause Necessary actions Incorrect paper guide Adjust the paper guide correctly. position • When adjusting the paper width, use the right side guide only, with the green clip. Do not hold the left side guide at this time, or skew will occur.
  • Page 519 Troubleshooting Guide Symptom Possible cause Necessary actions tray them.
  • Page 520 Jam Detection Jam Detection Paper Jam History Checking Logs Plotter (print engine) jam history can be displayed using SP7-507. The jam history of the 10 latest jams is displayed. • SP7-507-001 "Plotter Jam: History Latest" • SP7-507-002 "Plotter Jam: History Latest1" •...
  • Page 521 Jam Detection SP7-504 and SP7-505 (for ADF) show how many jams occurred at each location. Description SP No. Indication on the operation Code panel Initial jam at power on 7-504-001 B, C, Z, Y1, Y2, P 7-505-001(for ADF) Paper is not fed from 1st tray. 7-504-003 Paper is not fed from 2nd tray.
  • Page 522 Jam Detection Description SP No. Indication on the operation Code panel Vertical transport sensor 1 does not turn off. 7-504-052 Vertical transport sensor 2 does not turn off. 7-504-053 Registration sensor does not turn off. 7-504-057 Paper exit sensor does not turn off. 7-504-060 1-bin tray exit sensor does not turn off.
  • Page 523 Jam Detection Callout Sensor Callout Sensor Paper exit sensor Duplex exit sensor Fusing exit sensor Bypass paper end sensor Fusing entrance sensor Vertical transport sensor 1 Registration sensor Vertical transport sensor 2 Paper feed sensor PFU paper end sensor Paper Size Code Size Code Paper Size Size Code...
  • Page 524 Electrical Component Defects Electrical Component Defects Sensors Sensor Name/ Active CN No./ Condition Symptom Sensor Board Name Pin No. Bypass Lift Sensor CN523/11 Open SC508 Shorted By-pass Paper End Sensor CN523/5 Open Paper is detected on the by-pass tray when no paper is set. Shorted Paper is not detected on the by-pass tray when paper is set.
  • Page 525 Electrical Component Defects Sensor Name/ Active CN No./ Condition Symptom Sensor Board Name Pin No. is paper in the paper tray. Shorted Paper end is not detected when there is no paper in the paper tray. Paper Feed Sensor CN559/14 Open Jam A Shorted...
  • Page 526 Electrical Component Defects Sensor Name/ Active CN No./ Condition Symptom Sensor Board Name Pin No. ADF Registration Sensor CN404/28 Open Jam P Shorted Pressure Roller Thermistor CN525/23 Open SC571 (Edge:Rear) Shorted Pressure Roller Thermistor CN525/21 Open SC561 (Center) Shorted Pressure Roller Thermistor CN525/25 Open SC591...
  • Page 527 Electrical Component Defects Fuse Connector (Out) Capacity Voltage Part No. Part Name Replaceable Name CN613-2 (5V) 250V 11071351 SCT5A FU102 N/A (Protecting the voltage 250V 11071388 FIH 250V converter circuit in the PSU) 10A(EM)8A03 FU101 N/A (Protecting the fusing 250V 11071241 TCL-15A-N4 circuit in the PSU) FU103...
  • Page 528 Other Troubleshooting Other Troubleshooting When You Cannot Open the Right Door Problem: The right cover (duplex unit) does not open, even if the opening/closing lever is operated. Causes: When replacing parts, for example, the duplex unit, hooking the hook band [A] has been forgotten, so the opening/closing lever and the duplex hook parts do not work together.
  • Page 529 Other Troubleshooting Remove the cover [A]. ( × 1) Remove the interlock switch cover [A]. ( × 3) Remove the bracket. ( ×1)
  • Page 530 Other Troubleshooting Release the hook [A] from the hole where the bracket was removed. When Fluorescent or LED Lamps Flicker Problem: Under the usage environment of this machine, at the placement location, fluorescent and/or LED lamps flicker. Causes: This is a result of the voltage drop that occurs when power is applied to the fusing lamp. It depends on the electrical power environment at the customer's location.
  • Page 531 Other Troubleshooting Timing Solutions Side Effect • If a fusing offset occurs, in the related SP to fusing offsets, setting values must be changed Set SP1-190-001 (Flicker • If the adhesion amount of an image is large, an Printing Control) to "1 (ON)". offset may occur.
  • Page 532 Other Troubleshooting whether the fusing unit is the cause, by using SP1-158 (Abnormal Noise Confirmation). If the fusing unit is the cause, replace the fusing unit. If the drive module is the cause, in addition perform the operation check of various motors by using output checks, to identify which motor is the cause. Related SPs SP No.
  • Page 533 Other Troubleshooting SP No. SP Name Function Description SP1-158-007 Abnormal Noise Confirmation: Temperature setting for Press Target Temp SP1-153-001 (Unit: Execute)
  • Page 534 Differences between MP C307/C407 and C306/C406 7. Detailed Descriptions Differences between MP C307/C407 and C306/C406 The following table describes the differences between MP C307/C407 and C306/C406 series: Items MP C307/C407 Note C306/C406 Mainframe Controller Improvement on OCR performance Higher Yield...
  • Page 535 Differences between MP C307/C407 and C306/C406 Items MP C307/C407 Note C306/C406 the CIS unit or SPDF. not required after replacing. • Paper Feed PB1080 PB1080 PB1080TE is PFU which can • Unit be locked with a key. PB1080TE (Only for NA)
  • Page 536 Differences between MP C307/C407 and C306/C406 Items MP C307/C407 Note C306/C406 C6004/C5504/C4504/C3504/C3004) Data Type M19 Type I Overwrite (Common with MP Security C6004/C5504/C4504/C3504/C3004)
  • Page 537 ADF Unit ADF Unit Overview Name Name Original tray Transport sensor Top cover set sensor Scanning guide plate (front side) Original set sensor Pre-scanning roller (rear side) Pick-up roller Scanning guide plate (rear side) Original set sensor actuator Stopper ADF exit roller Friction pad Platen Feed roller...
  • Page 538 ADF Unit Name Name ADF feed roller clutch ADF relay board ADF feed sensor ADF drive motor ADF transport sensor Top cover sensor Original set sensor Original Transport Drive The ADF drive motor [A] drives all ADF rollers via gears. The feed roller clutch [B] controls the mechanism for picking up the original.
  • Page 539 ADF Unit Original Set Detection When an original [A] is placed on the original tray correctly, the original set sensor actuator [B] is pushed up and the original set sensor [C] turns off (not interrupted). The machine judges this state as the placement of an original.
  • Page 540 ADF Unit The original is fed by the ADF entrance roller [A] and the pre-scanning (front side) roller [B], scanned on the exposure glass under the scanning guide plate (front side) [C], and then delivered by the pre-scanning (rear side) roller [D].
  • Page 541 ADF Unit Double-feed Detection (Optional) A pair of ultrasound sensors are mounted in the ADF, one below the original feed path (emitter [A]) and the other above the path (receiver [B]). • When the original passes between the sensors, an ultra-sound wave from the emitter sensor below passes through the paper to the receiver above.
  • Page 542 ADF Unit This double feed detection will not function with originals that have: • Folds, wrinkles, tears • Holes • Imperfectly fused images • Perforations • Taped connections • Taped surfaces Feeding such originals could cause false detection of double-feeds. The service technician can also switch double-feed detection off/on with SP6-040-001 (Page Keeper: Mount Select, Default 0: Off).
  • Page 543 Scanner Unit Scanner Unit Overview Callout Item Callout Item Exposure glass (for ADF) ADF set sensor Exposure glass (for platen mode) Scanner carriage drive belt Scanner HP sensor Scanner motor Scanner carriage • Automatic paper size detection is not available because this model has no APS (sensor that detects original’s paper size) in the scanner.
  • Page 544 Scanner Unit Callout Item Callout Item LED array board (LEDB) 4th mirror Light guiding panel 5th mirror Reflectors Lens 1st mirror 2nd mirror Light Path 3rd mirror Scanner Carriage Drive Callout Callout Item Scanner carriage Scanner drive belt Scanner motor Scanner HP sensor Guide rod The scanner motor [C] drives the drive belt [B] in order to move the scanner carriage [A] along the guide rod...
  • Page 545 Scanner Unit returns to the scanner HP sensor. The actuator for the scanner HP sensor is on the underside of the carriage. When you wish to move the carriage, use the drive belt. Do not pull the carriage directly. Improved Tolerance to Black Lines When Paper Passes through ADF This model uses a conventional mechanism in which paper comes in contact with the exposure glass during feeding.
  • Page 546 Scanner Unit [A]: Reading position [B]: Exposure glass [C]: Dirt • Dirt is detected when a document passes through, so the alert will not disappear until reading of the next document begins, even after exposure glass cleaning is performed. • If dirt is detected not on the exposure glass but on the background guide plate, the alert will not disappear even if the glass is wiped.
  • Page 547 Based on each model’s line speed, this product uses two different types of LD unit: MP C407 uses two beams per color to achieve higher line speed, while MP C307 uses one beam per color, which is the same as the...
  • Page 548 Laser Unit Laser Synchronizing System Callout Item Callout Item LD Board Synchronization Mirror Collimating Lens Synchronization Lens Polygon Motor Synchronization Detector Lens (L1) LD Unit Mirror 1 The LD unit has a synchronization detector at the left side of each unit (for the optical paths for the K and M drums only).
  • Page 549 Laser Unit Line Scanning Mechanism Callout Item Callout Item Polygon Motor (With Polygon Mirror) Lens (L1) Collimating Lens OPC Drum LD Board The image read by the scanner is written on the OPC drum [E] with the laser beams. The direction of main scanning is from the front to the rear of the machine.
  • Page 550 The +5VS_LPS are supplied to the two LD boards respectively. A safety switch turns off when the front cover or the right door is opened. As a result, the power supply (+24VL_LPS) to the BiCU is cut off. This system prevents unexpected laser emission, ensures user safety and technician safety. MP C307 series...
  • Page 551 Laser Unit MP C407 series...
  • Page 552 PCDU PCDU Overview Drum Section Callout Item Callout Item OPC Drum Cleaning Blade Waste Toner Transport Coil Charge Roller Lubricant Brush Roller Charge Roller Cleaning Roller Lubricant Development Section Callout Item Callout Item Doctor Blade Toner Transport Coil (Lower) Toner Transport Coil (Upper) Toner Density Sensor ( sensor) Development Roller...
  • Page 553 PCDU OPC Drum Callout Item Callout Item Waste Toner Transport Coil Charge Roller Cleaning Roller Lubricant Brush roller OPC Drum Lubricant Image Transfer Belt (ITB) Drum Cleaning Blade (Counter Rotation) Image Transfer Roller (1st Transfer Roller) Charge Roller Charge Mechanism A charge roller [E] charges the surface of the OPC drum [G] and drives the charge roller cleaning roller [F].
  • Page 554 PCDU waste toner bottle via the front of the unit. Discharge Mechanism This machine uses spontaneous discharge to remove remaining charge from the drum. A quenching lamp is not used. Differences between K and CMY Left: K Right: CMY The following points are the differences between K and CMY. Lubricant [B] quantity K >...
  • Page 555 PCDU Development Unit Callout Item Callout Item Toner Transport Coil (Upper) Development Roller (Sleeve Architecture) Toner Transport Coil (Lower) OPC Drum Toner Density Sensor (Sensor) Doctor Blade Callout Item Callout Item Toner Transport Coil (Upper) Toner Density Sensor (mu ( ) Sensor) Toner Transport Coil (Lower) •...
  • Page 556 PCDU Toner and developer are regulated by the doctor blade, and applied to the development roller. • Toner Density Detection Mechanism Toner density sensor [C] detects the toner density. Toner is supplied when the toner density is not sufficient. • Toner Density Control The ID sensor at the lower right of the ITB detects the amount of light reflected from the drum and detects the toner density.
  • Page 557 Toner Supply Section Toner Supply Section Overview Callout Item Callout Item ID Chip Toner Transport Coil Bottle ID Chip Contact Board Agitator Toner Bottle Toner End Sensor Toner Supply Motor Shutter...
  • Page 558 Toner Supply Section Toner Supply and Transport Mechanism Callout Item Callout Item Toner End Sensor (Only for CMY) Toner Transport Coil Toner Bottle Agitator Toner Supply Motor Rotating the toner bottle [B] transports the toner towards the rear of the machine. Each toner bottle has an ID chip that stores information for each toner bottle.
  • Page 559 Toner Supply Section Toner Bottle Set Sensor Mechanism Callout Item Callout Item Bottle ID Chip Contact Board Toner Bottle ID Chip (One for Each Color) Each toner bottle [C] has an ID chip [B]. When the toner bottle [C] comes in contact with the bottle ID chip contact board [A], the machine detects that the toner bottle is set.
  • Page 560 Toner Supply Section Toner Supply Unit The agitator [G] transports the toner supplied into the sub-hopper by raising it to the toner transport path. The transport path is level to make the machine’s height lower. [A] Supply Housing [B] Toner Transport Path [C] Shutter [D] Sub-hopper [E] Toner Bottle Cap...
  • Page 561 Toner Supply Section [A] Positioning Hole [B] ID Chip [C] Tapered Boss (for Chip Positioning)
  • Page 562 Waste Toner Collection Waste Toner Collection Waste Toner Transport Mechanism Callout Item Callout Item Waste Toner Bottle Waste Toner Full Sensor Waste Toner Bottle Transport Coil Waste Toner Bottle Set Switch Waste Toner Agitator The waste toner collected from the ITB cleaning unit is transported towards the front of the machine and it goes into the waste toner bottle [A].
  • Page 563 Waste Toner Collection Waste Toner Collection Mechanism Callout Item Callout Item Waste Toner Full Sensor Waste Toner Agitator (for ITB Cleaning Unit) Waste Toner Agitator Waste Toner Bottle Transport Coil The waste toner agitator [B] carries waste toner piled up at the front of the waste toner bottle to the rear. The agitator [C] moves together with the waste toner bottle transport coil [D].
  • Page 564 Waste Toner Collection • When the waste toner bottle is full: • [A] Waste Toner Full Sensor • [B] Rubber Actuator • [C] Waste toner agitator • [D] Waste Toner...
  • Page 565 ITB/ Paper Transfer ITB/ Paper Transfer Overview Callout Item Callout Item Belt Tension Roller ID Sensor Shutter ITB Cleaning Blade ID Sensor Shutter Solenoid Waste Toner Transport Coil ITB Contact Cam (CMY) Discharge Plate ITB Contact Slider Paper Transfer Roller ITB (Image Transfer Belt) ITB Drive Roller ITB Contact Cam (K)
  • Page 566 ITB/ Paper Transfer Transfer Movement and Image Transport Callout Item Callout Item OPC Drum Paper Transfer Roller Image Transfer Roller (First Transfer Roller) Images of each color are created and transferred to the ITB (image transfer belt) [C]. The paper transfer roller [B] transfers the toner image from the ITB to the paper. This model uses the indirect transfer method to enhance the quality of transfer.
  • Page 567 ITB/ Paper Transfer • Indirect Image Transfer + Attraction Transfer Method (C306/C406/C307/C407): To eliminate the interference, applying the opposite bias to the paper transfer roller [A] is required. That is why the attraction transfer method is used in this model. Transfer Bias Callout Item...
  • Page 568 ITB/ Paper Transfer ITB Contact Callout Item Callout Item ITB Contact Cam (CMY) Contact Slider ITB Contact Motor Image Transfer Roller (First Transfer Roller) ITB Contact Sensor ITB has a contact mechanism to prevent the CMY drums from early deterioration. The color drums are not needed for B/W printing, so this mechanism releases the ITB from the CMY drums.
  • Page 569 ITB/ Paper Transfer ITB Cleaning Callout Item Callout Item ITB Cleaning Blade Waste Toner Collection Coil The cleaning blade [A] cleans the ITB [C]. The waste toner collection coil [B] transports the waste toner removed by the ITB cleaning blade towards the front of the machine. This model only uses a cleaning blade for cleaning, whereas the previous model uses a blade and a lubricant brush roller.
  • Page 570 ITB/ Paper Transfer The image position adjustment is done by the three ID sensors [A].
  • Page 571 Process Control and MUSIC Process Control and MUSIC Process Control Outline Process control adjusts the image creation process to maintain a constant image density. Process control is executed at the following times. Trigger Operative Condition Notes • Power ON Except when When a certain time passes after the previous job end, AND: More than six hours pass after the last OPC drum operation recovering from an...
  • Page 572 Process Control and MUSIC Trigger Operative Condition Notes Control Toner End When a Toner End is resolved. Recovery Initial Setting When an initial developer setting is completed. Vc is the charge bias, which is applied to the charge rollers. Vd is the potential of the unexposed (charged) drum. The value of Vc is not equal to Vd.
  • Page 573 Process Control and MUSIC Charge/Development Bias Control and Vtref Compensation Charge/Development bias control and Vtref Compensation is done using the following procedure. Its operating time varies depending on the machine’s line speed. Adjusting the ID sensor Vsg This step adjusts ID sensor’s LED’s light intensity so that Vsg, which is the ID sensor output when monitoring the bare surface of the ITB, becomes within 4.0±0.5V.
  • Page 574 Process Control and MUSIC machine issues SC370 (ID sensor Calibration Error). • SP3-320-011 (Vsg Error Counter) • SP3-320-013 (Vsg Upper Threshold) • SP3-320-014 (Vsg Lower Threshold) • The above SPs can only be accessed from Special Service mode. Agitating the Developer This step agitates the developer, and gets the TD sensor output.
  • Page 575 Process Control and MUSIC LD Power Control LD Control is set with SP3-600-001 (Process Control/ Select ProCon: LD Control). • If SP 3-600-001 is set to LD Power Control by Process Control (Default): The LD strength is adjusted based on a table which is determined by Development Bias Control and Vtref Correction. •...
  • Page 576 Process Control and MUSIC the machine checks the toner end sensor and Vt condition and deactivates the toner end condition. Developer Initial Setting When a new PCDU is set in the machine, the machine automatically detects it and enters the developer initial setting mode.
  • Page 577 Process Control and MUSIC The ID sensors [A] are installed at the upstream side of the paper transfer roller [B] and detect image density at the plate [C]. This layout allows the machine to detect a pattern faster and to help reduce waiting time. TD Sensor In this model, a non-contact toner density (TD) sensor, which we also call a mu ( ) sensor, is used for toner density control.
  • Page 578 Process Control and MUSIC MUSIC performs when: Notes The front cover is closed. Executes [Mode b] (*2) or [Mode a] (*1) The machine is waiting. Executes [Mode b] (*2) The machine detects a new PCDU automatically, ITB manually. Executes [Mode a] (*1) *1 [Mode a] fine adjusts twice.
  • Page 579 Fusing Fusing Overview Callout Item Callout Item Fusing Thermopile Pressure Roller Fusing Thermistor (NC Pressure Roller Thermistors (Edge: Front, Center, and, Edge: Sensor) Rear) Fusing Thermostat Entrance Guide Plate Separation Plate Fusing Sleeve Belt (QSU Method) Exit Guide Plate Fusing Lamp Pressure Arm Fuse for New Unit Detection...
  • Page 580 Fusing Fusing Mechanism Callout Item Callout Item Stay Fusing Sleeve Belt (Diameter: 25) Fusing Lamp Nip Pad Reflector Pressure Roller (Diameter: 25 The fusing unit uses the QSU system. (QSU: Quick Start Up). The heat from the fusing lamp [B] is reflected by the reflector [C] and heats the fusing sleeve belt [D]. The temperature at both ends of the fusing lamp is lower than the middle.
  • Page 581 Fusing Fusing Temperature Control Callout Item Callout Item Fusing Lamp Fusing Thermistor (NC Sensor) Fusing Thermostat Pressure Roller Thermistors (Edge: Front, Center, and Edge: Rear) Fusing Thermopile The fusing temperature is controlled by the fusing thermopile [C]. The thermostat [B] is a safety switch. The fusing unit must be replaced if the thermostat is blown. Fusing Drive Callout Item...
  • Page 582 Fusing Callout Item Callout Item Fusing Exit Sensor Pressure Roller Fusing Motor Fusing Sleeve Belt Fusing Entrance Sensor The fusing motor [B] drives the pressure roller [D] through gears. The pressure roller [D] drives the fusing sleeve belt [E]. The fusing entrance sensor [C] and fusing exit sensor [A] detect paper jams around/in the fusing unit. Fusing Temperature Control Warm-up mode When the main power switch is turned ON, the machine starts the fusing warm-up.
  • Page 583 Fusing Postcard Envelope Recovery Time CPM (Controlled) Output sheet count after one minute from recovery...
  • Page 584 Paper Feed and Registration Paper Feed and Registration Overview Callout Item Callout Item End Fence Registration Sensor Paper Feed Tray Paper Feed Sensor Side Fence Bypass Feed Roller Paper End Sensor Bypass Paper Width Sensor Paper Feed Roller Bypass Paper End Sensor Dust Collection Tray Friction Pad Registration Rollers (Right: Driven, Left: Drive)
  • Page 585 Paper Feed and Registration Callout Item Callout Item Paper Feed Clutch Bypass Feed Clutch Registration Roller Bypass Feed Roller Registration Clutch The drive from the paper transport motor is transmitted to each clutch through gears. The paper transport motor controls paper feed/exit, duplex, registration, waste toner transport coil and bypass tray lift. Sensor Locations in the Paper Feed Path Callout Item...
  • Page 586 Paper Feed and Registration Callout Item Callout Item Bottom Plate Tray Lift Motor Bottom Plate Lift Arm Tray Lift Sensor Bottom Plate Lift Gear Rack and Pinion Mechanism The tray lift motor rotates the gear [C] and the gear makes the rack [F] move. The movement of the rack pulls the spring and this moves the bottom plate lift arm [B].
  • Page 587 Paper Feed and Registration Paper Size Detection and Paper End Detection Callout Item Callout Item Bypass Paper Size Sensor Bypass Feed Paper End Sensor Bypass Feed Roller Bypass Feed Friction Pad The bypass paper size sensor [A] is not at the side of the tray but at the side of the bypass paper feed unit. The bypass paper size sensor is a photointerrupter, which detects when B5 paper or wider is placed in the tray.
  • Page 588 Paper Feed and Registration [B]: Draw-in Unit [C]: Spring...
  • Page 589 Paper Exit and Inverter Paper Exit and Inverter Overview Callout Item Callout Item Fusing exit sensor Paper exit/reverse roller Paper exit sensor Exit junction gate Paper Exit Operation Callout Item Callout Item...
  • Page 590 Paper Exit and Inverter Callout Item Callout Item Paper exit/reverse roller Paper exit sensor Exit junction gate The paper transport motor rotates the paper exit/reverse roller [A] through a gear. The paper exit sensor [C] detects paper exit jams and the paper inversion timing. Inverter Operation Callout Item...
  • Page 591 Paper Exit and Inverter paper exit tray.
  • Page 592 Duplex Duplex Overview Callout Item Callout Item Duplex Entrance Sensor Duplex Paper Transport Roller (Lower) Duplex Paper Transport Roller (Upper) Duplex Exit Sensor...
  • Page 593 Duplex Duplex Mechanism Callout Item Callout Item Duplex Entrance Sensor Duplex Clutch Duplex Exit Sensor Paper Transport Motor After the inverter mechanism feeds the paper back into the machine, the paper goes to the duplex feed path. Duplex feed is not possible when the bypass tray is in use. Duplex Drive The drive from the paper transport motor [D] is transmitted to the duplex clutch [C] through a gear, and the duplex clutch turns on to drive the duplex rollers.
  • Page 594 Duplex Interleaving This machine adopts “2 in 1” interleaving. The interleave operation of this machine is as follows: 1st sheet back -> 2nd sheet back -> first sheet front -> 2nd sheet front -> 3rd sheet back -> 4th sheet back.
  • Page 595 Electrical Parts Electrical Parts Block Diagram Board Outline Controller Board Controls the MFP system overall. Contains an x86 CPU, controller ASIC, IO control ASIC, and RAM. Scanning control circuit which performs analog signal processing and AD image conversion of the CCD read image.
  • Page 596 Electrical Parts BiCU Controls the engine, as well as MFP engine sensors, motors and solenoids (The BCU has the IOB functions). Controls the fax program. Controls the control panel. Power Packs (HVPS) Generates high-voltage power required for process control. The power pack consists of two units: T1/T2 for transfer and CB for charging/developing.
  • Page 597 Machine Ventilation Machine Ventilation Overview Callout Item Callout Item LD Unit Fan Temperature/Humidity Sensor Fusing Fan PCDU Cooling Duct Fan Ozone Filter PSU Fan The machine has four fans [A] [B] [E] [F] to ventilate the interior of the machine. There is a temperature/humidity sensor [D] at the front (lower right) of the machine.
  • Page 598 Machine Ventilation Status PCDU Cooling Fusing Fan PSU Fan LD Unit Fan Duct Fan Power ON – Stops Warm-up Standby Stops Rotates at low speed Stops Stops Standby after printing Printing Rotates at Rotates at full-speed Rotates at Rotates at full-speed Stops* Rotates at low-speed* full-speed*...
  • Page 599 Operation Panel Operation Panel Refer to “Smart Operation Panel” manual for details.
  • Page 600 Energy Save Energy Save Energy Saver Modes Customers should use energy saver modes properly, to save energy and protect the environment. The area shaded grey in this diagram represents the amount of energy that is saved when the timers are at the default settings.
  • Page 601 If [On (Energy Saving)] is selected, it takes longer than usual to be ready to use the machine. Recovery Time/Reduced Electrical Consumption Reduced electrical consumption in Sleep mode*1: MP C307 MP C407 NA/EU/AA: 1.0 W or less NA/EU/AA: 1.0 W or less...
  • Page 602 Energy Save Power States of this Machine State Description • 1 Standby/Printing State where normal operation is possible after warm-up • State during printing 2 Printing state/Panel State when printing with the backlight of the operation panel turned off 3 Fusing OFF State where the Standby Fusing OFF state is entered when the time set with the "Fusing Unit Off Mode (Energy Saving) On/Off"...
  • Page 603 Energy Save State Description • State where the operation panel is flashing and the fusing lamp is OFF. • The bottom plate of the paper feed tray is raised. 4 Quiet state Quiet state is entered when the Energy Saving key is pressed or the time set with the "Sleep Mode Timer"...
  • Page 604 Energy Save Verification of Up Time for each Energy Saving State The up time for each power state of the machine can be checked with SP8-961 (Electricity Status). It is also output on the SMC sheet. Name Description SP8-961-001 Ctrl Standby Time Cumulative time of Engine OFF mode, Quiet mode, and Standby mode SP8-961-002 STR Time Cumulative time of STR mode...
  • Page 605 Energy Save • SP8-941-006: SC (excluding mode SC) • SP8-941-007: Jam (plotter) • SP8-941-009: Supply/PM unit end With this data, and the power consumption values from the specifications, we can estimate the amount of energy that is used by the machine. This should only be used as a reference value, because the power consumption specifications are measured in a controlled environment with a constant power supply.
  • Page 606 Paper Feed Unit PB1080/PB1080TE (Optional) Paper Feed Unit PB1080/PB1080TE (Optional) Overview Callout Item Callout Item Side Fence Paper Transport Sensor End Fence Vertical Transport Cover Open/Close Switch Tray Bottom Plate Lift Sensor Friction Pad Tray Bottom Plate HP Sensor Tray Set Switch Paper End Sensor Bottom Plate Lift lever Remaining Paper Sensor...
  • Page 607 Paper Feed Unit PB1080/PB1080TE (Optional) Callout Item Callout Item Anti-condensation Heater (Option) Paper Feed Clutch Controller Board Tray Lift Motor Paper Feed Motor Callout Item Callout Item Tray Bottom Plate Lift Sensor Tray Set Switch Tray Bottom Plate HP Sensor Paper End Sensor Vertical Transport Clutch Remaining Paper Sensor...
  • Page 608 Paper Feed Unit PB1080/PB1080TE (Optional) Callout Item Callout Item Vertical Transport Cover Open/Close Switch Vertical Transport Sensor Paper Transport Drive Callout Item Callout Item Paper Feed Motor Vertical Transport Roller Vertical Transport Clutch Paper Feed Roller Paper Feed Clutch The paper feed motor drives the paper feed clutch [C] and the vertical transport clutch [B] through gears. The operation timing of each clutch is as follows.
  • Page 609 Paper Feed Unit PB1080/PB1080TE (Optional) Sensors and Friction Pad Callout Item Callout Item Paper End Sensor Vertical Transport Roller Remaining Paper Sensor Vertical Transport Sensor Paper Feed Roller Friction Pad Only one actuator is used for detecting paper end and remaining paper. The front side of the actuator is for the remaining paper sensor [B], and the rear side of the actuator is for the paper end sensor [A].
  • Page 610 Paper Feed Unit PB1080/PB1080TE (Optional) Tray Lifting up Mechanism Callout Item Callout Item Tray Bottom Plate Pressure Lever Tray Bottom Plate HP Sensor Tray Bottom Plate Lift Sensor Tray Bottom Plate Lift Lever Lift Lever Encoder Tray Bottom Plate The pressure of the tray bottom plate [F] can be adjusted depending on the amount of paper remaining. The pulses from the lift lever encoder [C] are detected by the tray bottom plate lift sensor [B].
  • Page 611 Paper Feed Unit PB1080/PB1080TE (Optional) Two keys are shipped including the spare. In either position Lock/Unlock, it is possible to pull out the key. The key will be horizontal in the lock position. If the key has been lost, arrange new keys registered as service parts (P/N: D3DC2891, this P/N is as of October, 2016).
  • Page 612 1 Bin Tray BN1030 (Optional) 1 Bin Tray BN1030 (Optional) Overview Callout Item Callout Item Paper Exit Tray Paper Exit Roller 1-Bin Tray Paper Remaining Sensor 1-Bin Tray Exit Sensor LED Board Electrical Components Callout Item Callout Item 1-Bin Tray Paper Remaining Sensor LED Board 1-Bin Tray Exit Sensor...
  • Page 613 1 Bin Tray BN1030 (Optional) Paper Exit from 1-Bin Tray Unit Callout Item Callout Item 1-Bin Tray Paper Remaining Sensor 1-Bin Tray Exit Sensor LED Board The paper from the paper exit section is transported to the 1-bin unit. This uses the same transport path as usual even if duplex is used. The1-bin tray paper remaining sensor [A] detects the fed out paper, and the LED [B] blinks to inform users that there is paper on the 1-bin tray after the end of the job.
  • Page 614 MP C307/C407 Machine Code: D296/D297/D298/D299 Appendices Ver 1.0 Latest Release: Nov, 2016 Initial Release: Nov, 2016 Copyright (c) 2016 Ricoh Co.,Ltd.
  • Page 616 1 Bin Tray Unit (D574) ........................... 15 Preventive Maintenance Tables ........................16 Maintenance Tables ............................. 16 Preventive Maintenance Items For MP C307 ....................16 Preventive Maintenance Items For MP C407 ....................19 SP Mode Tables ............................... 23 Service Program Mode ............................23 Enabling and Disabling Service Program Mode .....................
  • Page 617 SP Tables - SP6-XXX ............................256 SP6-XXX (Peripherals) ..........................256 SP Tables - SP7-XXX ............................258 SP7-XXX (Engine: Data Log) ........................258 SP7-XXX (Controller: Data Log) ......................... 288 SP Tables - SP8-XXX (1) ..........................304 Remarks ................................. 304 SP8-XXX (Data Log2) -1 ..........................306 SP Tables - SP8-XXX (2) ..........................
  • Page 618 How to Restrict Web Image Monitor Access to the Document Server ............396 User Authentication for Specific MFP Applications ..................397...

  • Page 619: Specifications

    1.Specifications 1. Specifications Specifications Mainframe Items MP C307/C407 MP C306/C406 Configuration: Desktop Scanning One-dimensional solid-state scanning through One-dimensional solid-state scanning element: through CCD A CIS is also used for scanning the back side of the ADF Printing process: Dry Electrostatic transfer system with dual component development; 4-drum method...
  • Page 620 1.Specifications Items MP C307/C407 MP C306/C406 Color: 7.5 seconds or less Color: 10.5 seconds or less B&W: 6.1 seconds or less B&W: 6.2 seconds or less Warm-up time: 48.6 seconds (23°C (73.4°F), rated voltage) 25 seconds (23°C (73.4°F), rated voltage)
  • Page 621 1.Specifications Items MP C307/C407 MP C306/C406 two paper tray units, and 1bin unit. unit, two paper tray units, and 1bin unit. Energy saver: Reduced electrical consumption: Reduced electrical consumption: C307/C407: 1.0 W or less North America C306: 0.71 W or less C406: 0.63 W or less...
  • Page 622 1.Specifications Items MP C307/C407 MP C306/C406 D x H): (including ADF and operation panel) 19.9"): (including ARDF and operation panel) Weight: 46 kg (101.4 lb.) Basic model: 40.5 kg (89.3 lb.) (including ADF) ADF model: 45 kg (99.3 lb.) Printer...

  • Page 623: Scanner

    1.Specifications Scanner Items MP C307/C407 MP C306/C406 Scanning Full-color scanner / Flatbed scanning method: TWAIN Mode: Scanning resolution: • Exposure glass: 100 to 1200 dpi • ADF: 100 to 600 dpi WIA Mode: • 100 to 1200 dpi Delivery Mode: •...
  • Page 624 1.Specifications Items MP C307/C407 MP C306/C406 Original transport: Roller transport Original feed order: From the top original Power source: DC 24V, 5V from the scanner unit.

  • Page 625: Supported Paper Sizes

    1.Specifications Supported Paper Sizes Paper Feed Paper Size Main Tray Paper Feed Unit Bypass Tray A4 SEF 210 x 297 mm A5 SEF 148 x 210 mm A5 LEF 210 x 148 mm A6 SEF 105 x 148 mm B5 SEF 182 x 257 mm B6 SEF 128 x 182 mm...

  • Page 626: Paper Exit

    1.Specifications Paper Exit Paper Size Main Tray 1 Bin Tray A4 SEF 210 x 297 mm A5 SEF 148 x 210 mm A5 LEF 210 x 148 mm A6 SEF 105 x 148 mm B5 SEF 182 x 257 mm B6 SEF 128 x 182 mm Legal SEF...

  • Page 627: Software Accessories

    1.Specifications Software Accessories The printer drivers and utility software are provided on one CD-ROM. An auto-run installer allows you to select which components to install. Printer Drivers Windows Type PCL5c PCL6 Windows Vista Starter Home Basic Home Premium Business Ultimate Enterprise Windows 7 Starter...

  • Page 628: Scanner And Lan Fax Drivers

    1.Specifications : Supported -: Not supported *RPCS driver has been discontinued. *1:SP1 or later is recommended *2:SP2 or later is Recommended *3:SP1 or later is recommended Mac OS Environment Printer Utility for Mac Mac OS 8.6 or later, Mac OS X classic Mac OS X Native: v.10.57 or later : Supported -: Not supported...
  • Page 629 1.Specifications Operating system for WIA driver: Windows Vista (SP1 or later)/7/8/8.1, Windows Server 2008/2008 R2/2012/2012 R2 (WIA scanner can function under both 32- and 64-bit operating systems.) Operating system for LAN FAX driver: Windows Vista, Windows 7,8, 8.1, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2012, Windows Server 2008 R2, Windows Server 2012 R2 •...

  • Page 630: Optional Equipment

    1.Specifications Optional Equipment Paper Feed Unit (D573) Paper Feed System: Feed Roller and Friction Pad Paper Height Detection: Empty only Tray Capacity: 500 sheets Paper Weight: 60 to 163 g/m (16 to 43.5 lb.) Paper Size: A5 SEF to A4/LG SEF Power Source: DC 24V, 5V (from the mainframe) Power Consumption:...

  • Page 631: Preventive Maintenance Tables

    2.Preventive Maintenance Tables 2. Preventive Maintenance Tables Maintenance Tables Preventive Maintenance Items For MP C307 Chart: A4 (LT)/5% Mode: 2 prints/job Color Ratio: 30% Environment: Normal temperature and humidity Yield may change depending on circumstances and print conditions. Symbol keys: C: Clean, R: Replace, L: Lubricant, I: Inspect Yield Parts: The parts mentioned in these tables have a target yield.
  • Page 632 2.Preventive Maintenance Tables PCDU The PM count for the following items is based on the sheets of copy paper fed: Item PM/Yield 36k 60k EM Remarks Parts PCDU The PCDU (K) for C307 is different from C407. Make sure of the correct part number before ordering it.
  • Page 633 2.Preventive Maintenance Tables Item PM/Yield 60k 120k EM Remarks Parts Registration roller Clean with a blower brush. Registration sensor Clean with a blower brush or wipe with a dry cloth. Paper dust case Clean with a blower brush. Paper feed roller Wipe with a damp cloth.

  • Page 634: Preventive Maintenance Items For Mp C407

    2.Preventive Maintenance Tables 1-Bin Tray Unit (Optional) Item PM/Yield Remarks Parts Paper exit roller Wipe with a damp cloth, and then wipe the dry cloth. Paper exit tray Wipe with a damp cloth, and then wipe the dry cloth. 1-bin tray exit sensor Clean with a blower brush or wipe with a dry cloth.
  • Page 635 2.Preventive Maintenance Tables Scanner Unit Item PM/Yield Parts Remarks Exposure glass Clean with a cleaning cloth. ADF exposure glass Clean with a cleaning cloth. PCDU The PM count for the following items is based on the sheets of copy paper fed: Item PM/Yield 36k 60k EM...
  • Page 636 2.Preventive Maintenance Tables Paper Transport The PM count for the following items is based on the sheets of copy paper fed: Item PM/Yield 60k 120k EM Remarks Parts Registration roller Clean with a blower brush. Registration sensor Clean with a blower brush or wipe with a dry cloth.
  • Page 637 2.Preventive Maintenance Tables Item PM/Yield Parts 120k Remarks Tray Lift Pad Wipe with a damp cloth. Transport Sensor Wipe with a damp cloth. 1-Bin Tray Unit (Optional) Item PM/Yield Remarks Parts Paper exit roller Wipe with a damp cloth, and then wipe the dry cloth.

  • Page 638: Sp Mode Tables

    3.SP Mode Tables 3. SP Mode Tables Service Program Mode • Make sure that the data-in LED ( ) is not on before you go into the SP mode. This LED indicates that some data is coming to the machine. When the LED is on, wait for the copier to process the data. Enabling and Disabling Service Program Mode Make sure that the data-in LED ( ) is not on before you go into the SP mode.

  • Page 639: Types Of Sp Modes

    3.SP Mode Tables Enter the key code for SP mode. For details of the key code to enter the SP mode, ask your supervisor. Exiting SP Mode • Press "Exit" on the LCD twice to return to the copy window. Types of SP Modes •...
  • Page 640 3.SP Mode Tables Opens all SP groups and sublevels. Closes all open groups and sublevels and restores the initial SP mode display. Opens the copy window (copy mode) so you can make test copies. Press SP Mode (highlighted) in the copy window to return to the SP mode screen, Enter the SP code directly with the number keys if you know the SP number.
  • Page 641 3.SP Mode Tables Use the center touch-panel buttons to scroll to the number and title of the item that you want to set and press it. The small entry box on the right activates and shows the below default or the current settings. •...

  • Page 642: Remarks

    3.SP Mode Tables • Turn the machine off and on. Tell the administrator that you have completed servicing the machine. • The Administrator will then set the "Service Mode Lock" to ON. Remarks Display on the Control Panel Screen The maximum number of characters which can show on the control panel screen is limited to 30 characters. For this reason, some of the SP modes shown on the screen need to be abbreviated.
  • Page 643 3.SP Mode Tables DFU: Design/Factory Use only Do not touch these SP modes in the field. A sharp (#) to the right hand side of the mode number column means that the main switch must be turned off and on to effect the setting change. An asterisk (*) to the right hand side of the mode number column means that this mode is stored in the NVRAM and EEPROM.

  • Page 644: Sp Tables - Sp1-Xxx

    3.SP Mode Tables SP Tables - SP1-XXX SP1-XXX (Feed) SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step] 1-001- Leading Edge Tray: Plain [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm ] Registration 1-001- Leading Edge Tray: Middle Thick [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm ] Registration 1-001-...
  • Page 645 3.SP Mode Tables Registration 1-001- Leading Edge Duplex: Special 1 [ -9 to 9 / 1.1 / Registration 0.1mm ] 1-001- Leading Edge Tray: Special 1: 1200 [ -9 to 9 / 1.1 / Registration 0.1mm ] 1-001- Leading Edge By-pass: Special 1: 1200 [ -9 to 9 / 1.1 / Registration...
  • Page 646 3.SP Mode Tables Registration 1-001- Leading Edge Tray: Special1: Std Speed 2 [ -9 to 9 / 1.1 / Registration 0.1mm ] 1-001- Leading Edge By-pass: Special1: Std Speed 2 [ -9 to 9 / 1.1 / Registration 0.1mm ] 1-001- Leading Edge Duplex: Special1: Std Speed 2...
  • Page 647 Duplex: Plain: Std. Spd. 2 [ -5 to 5 / 0 / 1mm ] 1-105- Print Target Plain1:FC:Center ENG* MP C307: Temperature [ 100 to 180 / 143 / 1deg ] MP C407: [ 100 to 200 / 168 /...
  • Page 648 [ 100 to 200 / 180 / 1deg ] 1-105- Print Target Plain2:BW:Center ENG* [ 100 to 180 / * / Temperature 1deg ] *MP C307:144 *MP C407:162 1-105- Print Target Thin:FC:Center ENG* [ 100 to 180 / * / Temperature 1deg ]...
  • Page 649 3.SP Mode Tables 1-105- Print Target Special1:BW:Center ENG* [ 100 to 180 / * / Temperature 1deg ] *MP C307:139 *MP C407:1357 1-105- Print Target Special2:FC:Center ENG* MP C307: Temperature [ 100 to 180 / 154 / 1deg ] MP C407:...
  • Page 650 3.SP Mode Tables 1-105- Print Target Special 1:FC:Center:Low Speed ENG* [ 100 to 180 / 127 / Temperature 1deg ] 1-105- Print Target Special 1:BW:Center:Low Speed ENG* [ 100 to 180 / 127 / Temperature 1deg ] 1-105- Print Target Special 2:FC:Center:Low Speed ENG* [ 100 to 180 / 129 /...
  • Page 651 3: 252mm/s (C407) 1-112- Image Processing Temp.:Plain:Center:Energy Saving ENG* [ -30 to 20 / * / 1deg ] Temp. Correct *MP C307:13 *MP C407:17 1-112- Image Processing Temp.:Plain:Press:Energy Saving ENG* [ -30 to 20 / 0 / 1deg ] Temp. Correct...
  • Page 652 3.SP Mode Tables 1: Fusing Quality Mode 1 2: Fusing Quality Mode 2 1-132- Voltage Detection Voltage Detection ENG* [ 0 to 650 / 0 / 0.1V ] 1-132- Voltage Detection ENG* [ 0 to 350 / 0 / 0.1V ] 1-132- Voltage Detection ENG*...
  • Page 653 [ 0 to 3 / 0 / 1 ] Confirmation 0: 89mm/s (C307, C407) 1: 178mm/s (C307, C407) 2: 212mm/s (C407) 3: 252mm/s (C407) 1-158- Abnormal Noise Heat Center Target Temp ENG* [ 100 to 180 / * / Confirmation 1deg ] *MP C307:154...
  • Page 654 3.SP Mode Tables *MP C407:180 1-158- Abnormal Noise Press Target Temp ENG* [ 0 to 200 / 150 / Confirmation 1deg ] 1-190- Flicker Control Flicker Control ENG* [ 0 or 1 / 0 / 1 ] 1-201- 1Bin Duty Control Control Operating Time [ 5 to 35 / 35 / 15min ] 1-801-...
  • Page 655 [ -4 to 4 / 0 / 0.01% ] Adjustment 1-801- Motor Speed Col Drum/Dev. Mot: Std Speed 1 ENG* MP C307: Adjustment [ -6 to 6 / 0 / 1STEP ] MP C407: [ -5 to 5 / 0 / 1STEP ] 1-801- Motor Speed Col Drum/Dev.
  • Page 656 3.SP Mode Tables Adjustment Spd 2 0.01% ] 1-801- Motor Speed Drum Motor Adjustment Control ENG* [ 0 or 1 / 1 / 1STEP ] Adjustment 1-801- Motor Speed Color Dev. Mot.:Std Speed1 ENG* [ -20 to 20 / 0 / 0.1% ] Adjustment 1-801- Motor Speed...
  • Page 657 3.SP Mode Tables Adj. 1-907- Paper Feed Timing Tray1 Paper Exit Sensor: Middle [ -10 to 10 / 0 / 1mm ] Adj. Thick 1-907- Paper Feed Timing Tray1 Paper Exit Sensor: Thick [ -10 to 10 / 0 / 1mm ] Adj.
  • Page 658 3.SP Mode Tables Adj. 1-907- Paper Feed Timing Tray2: Paper Interval: Mid. Thick ENG* [ -10 to 10 / 0 / 1mm ] Adj. 1-907- Paper Feed Timing Tray2: Paper Interval: Thick ENG* [ -10 to 10 / 0 / 1mm ] Adj.
  • Page 659 3.SP Mode Tables Adj. 1-907- Paper Feed Timing Tray1 Paper Exit Sen.: Plain: Std [ -10 to 10 / 0 / 1mm ] Adj. Spd 2 1-907- Paper Feed Timing Tray1 Paper Exit Sen.: Middle [ -10 to 10 / 0 / 1mm ] Adj.
  • Page 660 3.SP Mode Tables Adj. Mid Speed 1-907- Paper Feed Timing Exit Clutch ON: Mid Speed [ -20 to 20 / 0 / 1mm ] Adj. 1-907- Paper Feed Timing Invert Clutch OFF: Invert : Plain [ -20 to 20 / 0 / 1mm ] Adj.
  • Page 661 3.SP Mode Tables 1-951- Fan Start Time Set PSU Fan ENG* [ 0 to 120 / 0 / 1sec ] 1-951- Fan Start Time Set Laser Unit Fan ENG* [ 0 to 120 / 0 / 1sec ] 1-952- Fan Control Off Mode ENG* [ 10 to 60 / 10 / 1min ] Time Set...

  • Page 662: Sp Tables - Sp2-Xxx (1)

    3.SP Mode Tables SP Tables - SP2-XXX (1) SP2-XXX (Drum) -1 Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step] Charge DC Voltage: Fix Plain: Bk ENG* [ 0 to 2000 / 590 / 10- 005- Charge DC Voltage: Fix Plain: C ENG* [ 0 to 2000 / 590 / 10-...
  • Page 663 3.SP Mode Tables Lubricant Apply Operation Page Setting 4: High Temp. ENG* [ 0 to 999 / 20 / 016- 1page ] Lubricant Apply Operation Coverage Threshold 1: Low ENG* [ 0 to 100 / 10 / 016- Speed 0.01% ] Lubricant Apply Operation Coverage Threshold 2: Low ENG*...
  • Page 664 3.SP Mode Tables Registration Correction Color Main Dot: Ma ENG* [ -512 to 511 / 0 / 101- 1dot ] Registration Correction Color Main Dot: Cy ENG* [ -512 to 511 / 0 / 101- 1dot ] Registration Correction Color Main Dot: Ye ENG* [ -512 to 511 / 0 / 101-...
  • Page 665 3.SP Mode Tables Magnification Adjustment Main Mag.: Low Speed: Cy ENG* [ -1 to 1 / 0.081 / 102- 0.001% ] Magnification Adjustment Main Mag.: Standard ENG* [ -1 to 1 / 0.081 / 102- Speed: Ye 0.001% ] Magnification Adjustment Main Mag.: Low Speed: Ye ENG* [ -1 to 1 / 0.081 /...
  • Page 666 3.SP Mode Tables Erase Margin Adjustment Right ENG* [ 0 to 9.9 / 2 / 0.1mm ] 103- Erase Margin Adjustment Duplex: Trailing Edge ENG* [ 0 to 9.9 / 0 / 0.1mm ] 103- Erase Margin Adjustment Duplex: Left Edge ENG* [ 0 to 9.9 / 0 / 0.1mm ] 103-...
  • Page 667 3.SP Mode Tables 11: Independent Pattern (1dot) 12: Independent Pattern (2dots) 13: Independent Pattern (4dots) 14: Trimming Area 15: Hound's Tooth Check (Vertical) 16: Hound's Tooth Check (Horizontal) 17: Band (Horizontal) 18: Band (Vertical) 19: Checker Flag Pattern 20: Grayscale (Vertical Margin) 21: Grayscale (Horizontal Margin)
  • Page 668 3.SP Mode Tables STOUT STOUT Selection ENG* [ 0 or 1 / 0 / 1 ] 110- LD Driver Error Bk [ 0x0000 to 0xFFFF / 110- 0x0000 / 1 ] LD Driver Error Ma [ 0x0000 to 0xFFFF / 110- 0x0000 / 1 ] LD Driver...
  • Page 669 3.SP Mode Tables Skew Adjustment Ma:Skew Adjustment ENG* [ -256 to 256 / 0 / 117- 1click ] Skew Adjustment Cy:Skew Adjustment ENG* [ -256 to 256 / 0 / 117- 1click ] Skew Adjustment Ye:Skew Adjustment ENG* [ -256 to 256 / 0 / 117- 1click ] Skew Adjustment...
  • Page 670 3.SP Mode Tables TM/ID Sensor Check Minimum: Front ENG* [ 0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01V ] 143- TM/ID Sensor Check Minimum: Center ENG* [ 0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01V ] 143- TM/ID Sensor Check Minimum: Rear ENG* [ 0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01V ] 143-...
  • Page 671 3.SP Mode Tables Shad. Correct Setting Front End Area: Ye: LD2 ENG* [ 50 to 150 / 100 / 154- 0.1% ] Vertical Line Width 600dpi:Bk ENG* [ 10 to 15 / 14 / 1 ] 160- Vertical Line Width 600dpi:Ma ENG* [ 10 to 15 / 14 / 1 ]...
  • Page 672 3.SP Mode Tables Line Pos. Adj. Clear MUSIC Result [ 0 or 1 / 0 / 1 ] 180- Line Position Adj. Result Skew: M ENG* [ -5000 to 5000 / 0 / 181- 0.001um ] Line Position Adj. Result M.
  • Page 673 3.SP Mode Tables Line Position Adj. Result Left Mag.: Subdot: C ENG* [ -32 to 32 / 0 / 181- 0.01dot ] Line Position Adj. Result Right Mag.: Subdot: C ENG* [ -32 to 32 / 0 / 181- 0.01dot ] Line Position Adj.
  • Page 674 3.SP Mode Tables Line Position Adj. Result S. Cor.: 1200 Line: Y ENG* [ -16384 to 16383 / 0 / 181- 1line ] Line Position Adj. Result S. Cor.: 1200 Sub: Y ENG* [ -1 to 1 / 0 / 181- 0.001line ] Line Position Adj.
  • Page 675 3.SP Mode Tables Line Position Offset M. Scan: Low: Subdot: M ENG* [ -1 to 1 / 0 / 0.01dot ] 182- Line Position Offset M. Scan: Standard: Dot: C ENG* [ -512 to 511 / 0 / 182- 1dot ] Line Position Offset M.
  • Page 676 3.SP Mode Tables Line Position Offset S. Scan: Standard: Line: M ENG* [ -16384 to 16383 / 0 / 182- 1line ] Line Position Offset S. Scan: Standard: Subline: ENG* [ -1 to 1 / 0 / 0.01line ] 182- Line Position Offset S.
  • Page 677 3.SP Mode Tables Line Position Offset S. Scan: Standard: Subline: ENG* [ -1 to 1 / 0 / 0.01line ] 182- Line Position Offset S. Scan: Middle: Line: Y ENG* [ -16384 to 16383 / 0 / 182- 1line ] Line Position Offset S.
  • Page 678 3.SP Mode Tables MUSIC Condition Set Temp. Change 2 ENG* [ 0 to 100 / 10 / 1deg ] 193- MUSIC Condition Set Page: Power ON:BW+FC ENG* [ 0 to 999 / 200 / 193- 1page ] MUSIC Execution Result Year ENG* [ 0 to 99 / 0 / 1year ]...
  • Page 679 3.SP Mode Tables MUSIC Execution Result Error Result: Y ENG* [ 0 to 9 / 0 / 1 ] 194- MUSIC Execution Result Error Result: Bk ENG* [ 0 to 9 / 0 / 1 ] 194- LD Power: Fixed: Set Standard Speed: Bk ENG* [ 0 to 200 / 100 / 1% ]...
  • Page 680 3.SP Mode Tables PCDU Temperature: Display PCDU Temperature [ 0 to 70 / 0 / 0.1deg ] 241- TS Operation Env. Log Distance: PCU: Bk: [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 242- TS<=A-3 1mm ] TS Operation Env. Log Distance: PCU: Bk: A- [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 242-...
  • Page 681 3.SP Mode Tables Time-Lapse Correction Current Div Bk ENG* [ 0 to 3 / 0 / 1 ] 303- Time-Lapse Correction Current Div C ENG* [ 0 to 3 / 0 / 1 ] 303- Time-Lapse Correction Current Div M ENG* [ 0 to 3 / 0 / 1 ] 303-...
  • Page 682 3.SP Mode Tables Time-Lapse Correction:Transfer Threshold 4 ENG* [ 0 to 999999999 / 0 / 304- 1mm ] Vc Correction Threshold 1 ENG* [ 0 to 2000 / 450 / 10- 305- Vc Correction Threshold 2 ENG* [ 0 to 2000 / 600 / 10- 305- Vc Correction Threshold 3...
  • Page 683 3.SP Mode Tables Transfer Roller CL: Bias Neg. Bias: After ProControl ENG* [ 0 to 2100 / 1000 / 326- 10-V ] Transfer Roller CL: Bias Pos. Bias Corr Coef: After ENG* [ 10 to 995 / 100 / 326- ProCon 10% ] Transfer Roller CL: Bias...
  • Page 684 3.SP Mode Tables Common: FC: Bias Image Transfer: Std Spd: M ENG* [ 0 to 2100 / 1400 / 357- 10V ] Common: FC: Bias Image Transfer: Std Spd: Y ENG* [ 0 to 2100 / 1400 / 357- 10V ] Common: FC: Bias Image Transfer: Middle ENG*...
  • Page 685 3.SP Mode Tables Common:FC:Env.CorrectionTable ImageTransfer: Std Spd: Bk ENG* [ 1 to 100 / 6 / 1 ] 360- Common:FC:Env.CorrectionTable ImageTransfer: Std Spd: C ENG* [ 1 to 100 / 5 / 1 ] 360- Common:FC:Env.CorrectionTable ImageTransfer: Std Spd: M ENG* [ 1 to 100 / 5 / 1 ] 360-...
  • Page 686 3.SP Mode Tables Time-Lapse Correction: Div 1 Middle Speed: Bk ENG* [ 1 to 60 / 1 / 1 ] 361- Time-Lapse Correction: Div 1 Low Speed: Bk ENG* [ 1 to 60 / 1 / 1 ] 361- Time-Lapse Correction: Div 1 Standard Speed: FC: Bk ENG* [ 1 to 60 / 1 / 1 ]...
  • Page 687 3.SP Mode Tables Time-Lapse Correction: Div 1 Low Speed: FC: Y ENG* [ 1 to 60 / 1 / 1 ] 361- Time-Lapse Correction: Div 2 Standard Speed: Bk ENG* [ 1 to 60 / 1 / 1 ] 362- Time-Lapse Correction: Div 2 Middle Speed: Bk ENG*...
  • Page 688 3.SP Mode Tables Time-Lapse Correction: Div 2 Low Speed: FC: C ENG* [ 1 to 60 / 1 / 1 ] 362- Time-Lapse Correction: Div 2 Low Speed: FC: M ENG* [ 1 to 60 / 1 / 1 ] 362- Time-Lapse Correction: Div 2 Low Speed: FC: Y...
  • Page 689 3.SP Mode Tables Time-Lapse Correction: Div 3 Middle Speed: FC: Y ENG* [ 1 to 60 / 1 / 1 ] 363- Time-Lapse Correction: Div 3 Low Speed: FC: Bk ENG* [ 1 to 60 / 1 / 1 ] 363- Time-Lapse Correction: Div 3 Low Speed: FC: C...
  • Page 690 3.SP Mode Tables Time-Lapse Correction:Transfer Low Speed: Div3 ENG* [ 0 to 2000 / 0 / 10V ] 373- Time-Lapse Correction:Transfer Standard Speed: Div4 ENG* [ 0 to 2000 / 0 / 10V ] 374- Time-Lapse Correction:Transfer Middle Speed: Div4 ENG* [ 0 to 2000 / 0 / 10V ] 374-...
  • Page 691 Paper Transfer: Std Spd: ENG* [ 0 to 200 / * / 1uA ] 403- 1Side *MP C307: 21 *MP C407: 24 Plain 1: Bias: BW Paper Transfer: Std Spd: ENG* [ 0 to 200 / * / 1uA ]...
  • Page 692 Paper Transfer: Std Spd: ENG* [ 0 to 200 / * / 1uA ] 407- 1Side *MP C307: 22 *MP C407: 25 Plain 1: Bias: FC Paper Transfer: Std Spd: ENG* [ 0 to 200 / * / 1uA ]...
  • Page 693 3.SP Mode Tables Plain 1: Size Correction:BW Paper Transfer: Low Spd: ENG* [ 100 to 995 / 130 / 411- 1Side:S3 5% ] Plain 1: Size Correction:BW Paper Transfer: Low Spd: ENG* [ 100 to 995 / 213 / 411- 2Side:S3 5% ] Plain 1: Size Correction:BW...
  • Page 694 3.SP Mode Tables Plain 1: Size Correction:FC Paper Transfer: Low Spd: ENG* [ 100 to 995 / 250 / 412- 2Side:S4 5% ] Plain 1: Size-Env.Correct:BW Paper Transfer: Std Spd: ENG* [ 1 to 100 / 21 / 1 ] 413- 1Side:S1 Plain 1: Size-Env.Correct:BW...
  • Page 695 3.SP Mode Tables Plain 1: Size-Env.Correct:FC Paper Transfer: Low Spd: ENG* [ 1 to 100 / 25 / 1 ] 414- 1Side:S1 Plain 1: Size-Env.Correct:FC Paper Transfer: Low Spd: ENG* [ 1 to 100 / 26 / 1 ] 414- 2Side:S1 Plain 1: Size-Env.Correct:FC Paper Transfer: Low Spd:...
  • Page 696 3.SP Mode Tables Plain 1: Leading Edge Correct. Separation DC: Std Spd: ENG* [ 0 to 995 / 100 / 5% ] 415- 2Side Plain 1: Leading Edge Correct. Separation DC: Low Spd: ENG* [ 0 to 995 / 100 / 5% ] 415- 1Side Plain 1: Leading Edge Correct.
  • Page 697 3.SP Mode Tables Plain 1: Trail Edge Correction Paper Transfer: Low Spd: ENG* [ 0 to 995 / 100 / 5% ] 417- 1Side Plain 1: Trail Edge Correction Paper Transfer: Low Spd: ENG* [ 0 to 995 / 100 / 5% ] 417- 2Side Plain 1: Trail Edge Correction...
  • Page 698 3.SP Mode Tables Plain 1: SW Timing Trail Edge Separation DC: Low Spd: ENG* [ 0 to 50 / 0 / 2mm ] 418- 2Side Plain 1: Envir Correct. Table Separation DC: Std Spd: ENG* [ 1 to 100 / 30 / 1 ] 419- 1Side Plain 1: Envir Correct.
  • Page 699 Paper Transfer: Std Spd: ENG* [ 0 to 200 / * / 1uA ] 423- 1Side *MP C307: 19 *MP C407: 22 Plain 2: Bias: BW Paper Transfer: Std Spd: ENG* [ 0 to 200 / * / 1uA ]...
  • Page 700 3.SP Mode Tables Plain 2: Size Correction:BW Paper Transfer: Low Spd: ENG* [ 100 to 995 / 100 / 431- 2Side:S1 5% ] Plain 2: Size Correction:BW Paper Transfer: Low Spd: ENG* [ 100 to 995 / 120 / 431- 1Side:S2 5% ] Plain 2: Size Correction:BW...
  • Page 701 3.SP Mode Tables Plain 2: Size Correction:FC Paper Transfer: Low Spd: ENG* [ 100 to 995 / 136 / 432- 1Side:S3 5% ] Plain 2: Size Correction:FC Paper Transfer: Low Spd: ENG* [ 100 to 995 / 180 / 432- 2Side:S3 5% ] Plain 2: Size Correction:FC...
  • Page 702 3.SP Mode Tables Plain 2: Size-Env.Correct:BW Paper Transfer: Low Spd: ENG* [ 1 to 100 / 44 / 1 ] 433- 2Side:S4 Plain 2: Size-Env.Correct:FC Paper Transfer: Std Spd: ENG* [ 1 to 100 / 35 / 1 ] 434- 1Side:S1 Plain 2: Size-Env.Correct:FC Paper Transfer: Std Spd:...
  • Page 703 3.SP Mode Tables Plain 2: Leading Edge Correct. Paper Transfer: Low Spd: ENG* [ 0 to 995 / 100 / 5% ] 435- 1Side Plain 2: Leading Edge Correct. Paper Transfer: Low Spd: ENG* [ 0 to 995 / 100 / 5% ] 435- 2Side Plain 2: Leading Edge Correct.
  • Page 704 3.SP Mode Tables Plain 2: SW Timing Lead Edge Separation DC: Low Spd: ENG* [ 0 to 50 / 0 / 2mm ] 436- 2Side Plain 2: Trail Edge Correction Paper Transfer: Std Spd: ENG* [ 0 to 995 / 100 / 5% ] 437- 1Side Plain 2: Trail Edge Correction...
  • Page 705 3.SP Mode Tables Plain 2: SW Timing Trail Edge Separation DC: Std Spd: ENG* [ 0 to 50 / 0 / 2mm ] 438- 1Side Plain 2: SW Timing Trail Edge Separation DC: Std Spd: ENG* [ 0 to 50 / 0 / 2mm ] 438- 2Side Plain 2: SW Timing Trail Edge...
  • Page 706 3.SP Mode Tables T1 at low temp and tempolarity Low speed:C ENG* [ 0 to 2100 / 1300 / 441- 10V ] T1 at low temp and tempolarity Low speed:M ENG* [ 0 to 2100 / 1300 / 441- 10V ] T1 at low temp and tempolarity Low speed:Y ENG*...
  • Page 707 3.SP Mode Tables M-Thick: Size Correction:BW Paper Transfer: Low Spd: ENG* [ 100 to 995 / 100 / 451- 1Side:S1 5% ] M-Thick: Size Correction:BW Paper Transfer: Low Spd: ENG* [ 100 to 995 / 100 / 451- 2Side:S1 5% ] M-Thick: Size Correction:BW Paper Transfer: Low Spd: ENG*...
  • Page 708 3.SP Mode Tables M-Thick: Size Correction:FC Paper Transfer: Low Spd: ENG* [ 100 to 995 / 180 / 452- 2Side:S2 5% ] M-Thick: Size Correction:FC Paper Transfer: Low Spd: ENG* [ 100 to 995 / 150 / 452- 1Side:S3 5% ] M-Thick: Size Correction:FC Paper Transfer: Low Spd: ENG*...
  • Page 709 3.SP Mode Tables M-Thick: Size-Env.Correct:BW Paper Transfer: Low Spd: ENG* [ 1 to 100 / 53 / 1 ] 453- 1Side:S4 M-Thick: Size-Env.Correct:BW Paper Transfer: Low Spd: ENG* [ 1 to 100 / 54 / 1 ] 453- 2Side:S4 M-Thick: Size-Env.Correct:FC Paper Transfer: Std/Mid ENG* [ 1 to 100 / 45 / 1 ]...
  • Page 710 3.SP Mode Tables M-Thick: Leading Edge Correct. Paper Transfer: Std/Mid ENG* [ 0 to 995 / 100 / 5% ] 455- Spd: 2Side M-Thick: Leading Edge Correct. Paper Transfer: Low Spd: ENG* [ 0 to 995 / 100 / 5% ] 455- 1Side M-Thick: Leading Edge Correct.
  • Page 711 3.SP Mode Tables M-Thick: SW Timing Lead Edge Separation DC: Low Spd: ENG* [ 0 to 50 / 0 / 2mm ] 456- 1Side M-Thick: SW Timing Lead Edge Separation DC: Low Spd: ENG* [ 0 to 50 / 0 / 2mm ] 456- 2Side M-Thick: Trail Edge Correction...
  • Page 712 3.SP Mode Tables M-Thick: SW Timing Trail Edge Paper Transfer: Low Spd: ENG* [ 0 to 50 / 0 / 2mm ] 458- 2Side M-Thick: SW Timing Trail Edge Separation DC: Std Spd: ENG* [ 0 to 50 / 0 / 2mm ] 458- 1Side M-Thick: SW Timing Trail Edge...
  • Page 713 3.SP Mode Tables Thick 1: Bias Separation DC: 1Side ENG* [ 0 to 4000 / 0 / 10-V ] 481- Thick 1: Bias Separation DC: 2Side ENG* [ 0 to 4000 / 0 / 10-V ] 481- Thick 1: Bias: BW Paper Transfer: 1Side ENG* [ 0 to 200 / 14 / 1uA ]...
  • Page 714 3.SP Mode Tables Thick 1: Size Correction:BW Paper Transfer: 2Side:S4 ENG* [ 100 to 995 / 278 / 491- 5% ] Thick 1: Size Correction:FC Paper Transfer: 1Side:S1 ENG* [ 100 to 995 / 100 / 492- 5% ] Thick 1: Size Correction:FC Paper Transfer: 2Side:S1 ENG* [ 100 to 995 / 100 /...
  • Page 715 3.SP Mode Tables Thick 1: Size-Env.Correct:BW Paper Transfer: 1Side:S3 ENG* [ 1 to 100 / 55 / 1 ] 493- Thick 1: Size-Env.Correct:BW Paper Transfer: 2Side:S3 ENG* [ 1 to 100 / 56 / 1 ] 493- Thick 1: Size-Env.Correct:BW Paper Transfer: 1Side:S4 ENG* [ 1 to 100 / 57 / 1 ]...
  • Page 716 3.SP Mode Tables Thick 1: Leading Edge Correct. Paper Transfer: 2Side ENG* [ 0 to 995 / 100 / 5% ] 495- Thick 1: Leading Edge Correct. Separation DC: 1Side ENG* [ 0 to 995 / 100 / 5% ] 495- Thick 1: Leading Edge Correct.
  • Page 717 3.SP Mode Tables Thick 1: SW Timing Trail Edge Separation DC: 1Side ENG* [ 0 to 50 / 0 / 2mm ] 498- Thick 1: SW Timing Trail Edge Separation DC: 2Side ENG* [ 0 to 50 / 0 / 2mm ] 498- Thick 1: Envir Correct.
  • Page 718 3.SP Mode Tables Thick 2: Size Correction:BW Paper Transfer: 2Side:S1 ENG* [ 100 to 995 / 100 / 511- 5% ] Thick 2: Size Correction:BW Paper Transfer: 1Side:S2 ENG* [ 100 to 995 / 100 / 511- 5% ] Thick 2: Size Correction:BW Paper Transfer: 2Side:S2 ENG* [ 100 to 995 / 163 /...
  • Page 719 3.SP Mode Tables Thick 2: Size Correction:FC Paper Transfer: 1Side:S4 ENG* [ 100 to 995 / 154 / 512- 5% ] Thick 2: Size Correction:FC Paper Transfer: 2Side:S4 ENG* [ 100 to 995 / 389 / 512- 5% ] Thick 2: Size-Env.Correct:BW Paper Transfer: 1Side:S1 ENG* [ 1 to 100 / 67 / 1 ]...
  • Page 720 3.SP Mode Tables Thick 2: Size-Env.Correct:FC Paper Transfer: 2Side:S2 ENG* [ 1 to 100 / 70 / 1 ] 514- Thick 2: Size-Env.Correct:FC Paper Transfer: 1Side:S3 ENG* [ 1 to 100 / 71 / 1 ] 514- Thick 2: Size-Env.Correct:FC Paper Transfer: 2Side:S3 ENG* [ 1 to 100 / 72 / 1 ]...
  • Page 721 3.SP Mode Tables Thick 2: Trail Edge Correction Paper Transfer: 1Side ENG* [ 0 to 995 / 100 / 5% ] 517- Thick 2: Trail Edge Correction Paper Transfer: 2Side ENG* [ 0 to 995 / 100 / 5% ] 517- Thick 2: Trail Edge Correction Separation DC: 1Side...
  • Page 722 3.SP Mode Tables Thick 3: Bias Separation DC: 2Side ENG* [ 0 to 4000 / 0 / 10-V ] 521- Thick 3: Bias: BW Paper Transfer: 1Side ENG* [ 0 to 200 / 9 / 1uA ] 523- Thick 3: Bias: BW Paper Transfer: 2Side ENG* [ 0 to 200 / 7 / 1uA ]...
  • Page 723 3.SP Mode Tables Thick 3: Size Correction:FC Paper Transfer: 1Side:S1 ENG* [ 100 to 995 / 100 / 532- 5% ] Thick 3: Size Correction:FC Paper Transfer: 2Side:S1 ENG* [ 100 to 995 / 100 / 532- 5% ] Thick 3: Size Correction:FC Paper Transfer: 1Side:S2 ENG* [ 100 to 995 / 118 /...
  • Page 724 3.SP Mode Tables Thick 3: Size-Env.Correct:BW Paper Transfer: 2Side:S3 ENG* [ 1 to 100 / 80 / 1 ] 533- Thick 3: Size-Env.Correct:BW Paper Transfer: 1Side:S4 ENG* [ 1 to 100 / 81 / 1 ] 533- Thick 3: Size-Env.Correct:BW Paper Transfer: 2Side:S4 ENG* [ 1 to 100 / 82 / 1 ]...
  • Page 725 3.SP Mode Tables Thick 3: Leading Edge Correct. Separation DC: 1Side ENG* [ 0 to 995 / 100 / 5% ] 535- Thick 3: Leading Edge Correct. Separation DC: 2Side ENG* [ 0 to 995 / 100 / 5% ] 535- Thick 3: SW Timing Lead Edge Paper Transfer: 1Side...
  • Page 726 3.SP Mode Tables Thick 3: SW Timing Trail Edge Separation DC: 2Side ENG* [ 0 to 50 / 0 / 2mm ] 538- Thick 3: Envir Correct. Table Separation DC: 1Side ENG* [ 1 to 100 / 30 / 1 ] 539- Thick 3: Envir Correct.
  • Page 727 3.SP Mode Tables SP Tables - SP2-XXX (2) SP2-XXX (Drum) -2 SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step] 2-541- OHP: Bias Separation DC ENG* [ 0 to 4000 / 0 / 10-V ] 2-543- OHP: Bias: BW Paper Transfer ENG* [ 0 to 200 / 9 / 1uA ]...
  • Page 728 2-563- Special 1: Bias: BW Paper Transfer: Std/Mid Spd: ENG* [ 0 to 200 / * / 1uA ] 1Side *MP C307: 21 *MP C407: 24 2-563- Special 1: Bias: BW Paper Transfer: Std/Mid Spd: ENG* [ 0 to 200 / * / 1uA ]...
  • Page 729 2-567- Special 1: Bias: FC Paper Transfer: Std/Mid Spd: ENG* [ 0 to 200 / * / 1uA ] 1Side *MP C307: 22 *MP C407: 25 2-567- Special 1: Bias: FC Paper Transfer: Std/Mid Spd: ENG* [ 0 to 200 / * / 1uA ]...
  • Page 730 3.SP Mode Tables 2Side:S4 5% ] 2-572- Special 1: SizeCorrection:FC Paper Transfer: Std/Mid Spd: ENG* [ 100 to 995 / 100 / 1Side:S1 5% ] 2-572- Special 1: SizeCorrection:FC Paper Transfer: Std/Mid Spd: ENG* [ 100 to 995 / 100 / 2Side:S1 5% ] 2-572-...
  • Page 731 3.SP Mode Tables Env.Correct:BW 1Side:S4 2-573- Special 1: Size- Paper Transfer: Low Spd: ENG* [ 1 to 100 / 32 / 1 ] Env.Correct:BW 2Side:S4 2-574- Special 1: Size- Paper Transfer: Std/Mid Spd: ENG* [ 1 to 100 / 23 / 1 ] Env.Correct:FC 1Side:S1 2-574-...
  • Page 732 3.SP Mode Tables LeadingEdgeCorrect. 2Side 2-576- Special 1: SW Timing Lead Paper Transfer: Std/Mid Spd: ENG* [ 0 to 50 / 0 / 2mm ] Edge 1Side 2-576- Special 1: SW Timing Lead Paper Transfer: Std/Mid Spd: ENG* [ 0 to 50 / 0 / 2mm ] Edge 2Side 2-576-...
  • Page 733 Separation DC: Low Spd: ENG* [ 0 to 4000 / 2000 / 2Side 10-V ] 2-583- Special 2: Bias: BW Paper Transfer: Std/Mid Spd: ENG* [ 0 to 200 / * / 1uA ] 1Side *MP C307: 19 *MP C407: 22...
  • Page 734 2-583- Special 2: Bias: BW Paper Transfer: Std/Mid Spd: ENG* [ 0 to 200 / * / 1uA ] 2Side *MP C307: 16 *MP C407: 18 2-583- Special 2: Bias: BW Paper Transfer: Low Spd: ENG* [ 0 to 200 / 11 / 1uA ]...
  • Page 735 3.SP Mode Tables 1Side:S4 5% ] 2-591- Special 2: SizeCorrection:BW Paper Transfer: Low Spd: ENG* [ 100 to 995 / 275 / 2Side:S4 5% ] 2-592- Special 2: SizeCorrection:FC Paper Transfer: Std/Mid Spd: ENG* [ 100 to 995 / 100 / 1Side:S1 5% ] 2-592-...
  • Page 736 3.SP Mode Tables Env.Correct:BW 2Side:S3 2-593- Special 2: Size- Paper Transfer: Low Spd: ENG* [ 1 to 100 / 43 / 1 ] Env.Correct:BW 1Side:S4 2-593- Special 2: Size- Paper Transfer: Low Spd: ENG* [ 1 to 100 / 44 / 1 ] Env.Correct:BW 2Side:S4 2-594-...
  • Page 737 3.SP Mode Tables LeadingEdgeCorrect. 1Side 2-595- Special 2: Separation DC: Low Spd: ENG* [ 0 to 995 / 100 / 5% ] LeadingEdgeCorrect. 2Side 2-596- Special 2: SW Timing Lead Paper Transfer: Std/Mid Spd: ENG* [ 0 to 50 / 0 / 2mm ] Edge 1Side 2-596-...
  • Page 738 3.SP Mode Tables Edge 2Side 2-598- Special 2: SWTiming Trail Paper Transfer: Low Spd: ENG* [ 0 to 50 / 0 / 2mm ] Edge 1Side 2-598- Special 2: SWTiming Trail Paper Transfer: Low Spd: ENG* [ 0 to 50 / 0 / 2mm ] Edge 2Side 2-598-...
  • Page 739 3.SP Mode Tables 1Side 2-603- Special 3: Bias: BW Paper Transfer: Std/Mid Spd: ENG* [ 0 to 200 / 16 / 1uA ] 2Side 2-603- Special 3: Bias: BW Paper Transfer: Low Spd: ENG* [ 0 to 200 / 10 / 1uA ] 1Side 2-603- Special 3: Bias: BW...
  • Page 740 3.SP Mode Tables 2Side:S4 5% ] 2-612- Special 3: SizeCorrection:FC Paper Transfer: Std/Mid Spd: ENG* [ 100 to 995 / 100 / 1Side:S1 5% ] 2-612- Special 3: SizeCorrection:FC Paper Transfer: Std/Mid Spd: ENG* [ 100 to 995 / 100 / 2Side:S1 5% ] 2-612-...
  • Page 741 3.SP Mode Tables Env.Correct:BW 1Side:S4 2-613- Special 3: Size- Paper Transfer: Low Spd: ENG* [ 1 to 100 / 54 / 1 ] Env.Correct:BW 2Side:S4 2-614- Special 3: Size- Paper Transfer: Std/Mid Spd: ENG* [ 1 to 100 / 45 / 1 ] Env.Correct:FC 1Side:S1 2-614-...
  • Page 742 3.SP Mode Tables LeadingEdgeCorrect. 2Side 2-616- Special 3: SW Timing Lead Paper Transfer: Std/Mid Spd: ENG* [ 0 to 50 / 0 / 2mm ] Edge 1Side 2-616- Special 3: SW Timing Lead Paper Transfer: Std/Mid Spd: ENG* [ 0 to 50 / 0 / 2mm ] Edge 2Side 2-616-...
  • Page 743 3.SP Mode Tables Edge 1Side 2-618- Special 3: SWTiming Trail Paper Transfer: Low Spd: ENG* [ 0 to 50 / 0 / 2mm ] Edge 2Side 2-618- Special 3: SWTiming Trail Separation DC: Std Spd: ENG* [ 0 to 50 / 0 / 2mm ] Edge 1Side 2-618-...
  • Page 744 3.SP Mode Tables 2-631- Special 4: SizeCorrection:BW Paper Transfer: 1Side: S1 ENG* [ 100 to 995 / 100 / 5% ] 2-631- Special 4: SizeCorrection:BW Paper Transfer: 2Side: S1 ENG* [ 100 to 995 / 100 / 5% ] 2-631- Special 4: SizeCorrection:BW Paper Transfer: 1Side: S2 ENG*...
  • Page 745 3.SP Mode Tables Env.Correct:BW 2-633- Special 4: Size- Paper Transfer: 2Side: S2 ENG* [ 1 to 100 / 62 / 1 ] Env.Correct:BW 2-633- Special 4: Size- Paper Transfer: 1Side: S3 ENG* [ 1 to 100 / 55 / 1 ] Env.Correct:BW 2-633- Special 4: Size-...
  • Page 746 3.SP Mode Tables Edge 2-636- Special 4: SW Timing Lead Separation DC: 1Side ENG* [ 0 to 50 / 0 / 2mm ] Edge 2-636- Special 4: SW Timing Lead Separation DC: 2Side ENG* [ 0 to 50 / 0 / 2mm ] Edge 2-637- Special 4:...
  • Page 747 3.SP Mode Tables 2-647- Special 5: Bias: FC Paper Transfer: 2Side ENG* [ 0 to 200 / 9 / 1uA ] 2-651- Special 5: SizeCorrection:BW Paper Transfer: 1Side: S1 ENG* [ 100 to 995 / 100 / 5% ] 2-651- Special 5: SizeCorrection:BW Paper Transfer: 2Side: S1 ENG*...
  • Page 748 3.SP Mode Tables Env.Correct:BW 2-653- Special 5: Size- Paper Transfer: 1Side: S2 ENG* [ 1 to 100 / 69 / 1 ] Env.Correct:BW 2-653- Special 5: Size- Paper Transfer: 2Side: S2 ENG* [ 1 to 100 / 70 / 1 ] Env.Correct:BW 2-653- Special 5: Size-...
  • Page 749 3.SP Mode Tables Edge 2-656- Special 5: SW Timing Lead Paper Transfer: 2Side ENG* [ 0 to 50 / 0 / 2mm ] Edge 2-656- Special 5: SW Timing Lead Separation DC: 1Side ENG* [ 0 to 50 / 0 / 2mm ] Edge 2-656- Special 5: SW Timing Lead...
  • Page 750 3.SP Mode Tables 2-667- Special 6: Bias: FC Paper Transfer: 1Side ENG* [ 0 to 200 / 11 / 1uA ] 2-667- Special 6: Bias: FC Paper Transfer: 2Side ENG* [ 0 to 200 / 9 / 1uA ] 2-671- Special 6: SizeCorrection:BW Paper Transfer: 1Side: S1 ENG*...
  • Page 751 3.SP Mode Tables Env.Correct:BW 2-673- Special 6: Size- Paper Transfer: 2Side: S1 ENG* [ 1 to 100 / 76 / 1 ] Env.Correct:BW 2-673- Special 6: Size- Paper Transfer: 1Side: S2 ENG* [ 1 to 100 / 77 / 1 ] Env.Correct:BW 2-673- Special 6: Size-...
  • Page 752 3.SP Mode Tables LeadingEdgeCorrect. 2-676- Special 6: Paper Transfer: 1Side ENG* [ 0 to 50 / 0 / 2mm ] SWTimingLeadEdge 2-676- Special 6: Paper Transfer: 2Side ENG* [ 0 to 50 / 0 / 2mm ] SWTimingLeadEdge 2-676- Special 6: Separation DC: 1Side ENG* [ 0 to 50 / 0 / 2mm ]...
  • Page 753 3.SP Mode Tables 2-690- ITB Contact Setting Special 4 ENG* [ 0 or 1 / 0 / 1 ] 2-690- ITB Contact Setting Special 5 ENG* [ 0 or 1 / 0 / 1 ] 2-690- ITB Contact Setting Special 6 ENG* [ 0 or 1 / 0 / 1 ] 2-900-...
  • Page 754 3.SP Mode Tables 2-915- Gain Set: Bk OPC Drum Standard Speed1 ENG* [ 0 or 1 / 0 / 1STEP ] 2-915- Gain Set: Bk OPC Drum Low Speed ENG* [ 0 or 1 / 1 / 1STEP ] 2-915- Gain Set: Bk OPC Drum Standard Speed2 ENG*...
  • Page 755 3.SP Mode Tables 2-990- Print Duty Control Cancellation Temp. Threshold ENG* [ 0 to 20 / 1 / 0.1deg ] 2-990- Print Duty Control ON/OFF Setting ENG* [ 0 or 1 / 1 / 1 ] 2-990- Print Duty Control Duty Control: Down- ENG* [ 0 to 120 / 0 / 1sec ]...

  • Page 756: Sp3-Xxx (Process)

    3.SP Mode Tables SP Tables - SP3-XXX SP3-XXX (Process) Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step] 3-011- Manual ProCon :Exe Normal ProCon [ 0 or 1 / 0 / 1 ] 3-011- Manual ProCon :Exe Toner Density Adjustment [ 0 or 1 / 0 / 1 ] 3-011- Manual ProCon :Exe...
  • Page 757 3.SP Mode Tables Execute 3-030- TD Sensor Initial Set: Execute: Color [ 0 or 1 / 0 / 1 ] Execute 3-030- TD Sensor Initial Set: Execute: Bk [ 0 or 1 / 0 / 1 ] Execute 3-030- TD Sensor Initial Set: Execute: C [ 0 or 1 / 0 / 1 ] Execute...
  • Page 758 3.SP Mode Tables 3-073- TD Sensor Check: Display mu Count:C ENG* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 1 ] 3-073- TD Sensor Check: Display mu Count:M ENG* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 1 ] 3-073- TD Sensor Check: Display mu Count:Y ENG* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 1 ]...
  • Page 759 3.SP Mode Tables Time: C 3-102- Toner Remaining: Display Toner Supply Motor Drive ENG* [ 0 to 500 / 0 / 0.001g ] Time: M 3-102- Toner Remaining: Display Toner Supply Motor Drive ENG* [ 0 to 500 / 0 / 0.001g ] Time: Y 3-102- Toner Remaining: Display...
  • Page 760 3.SP Mode Tables Display 3-123- Toner End Sen Status: Latest Output: C [ 0 or 1 / 0 / 1 ] Display 3-123- Toner End Sen Status: Latest Output: M [ 0 or 1 / 0 / 1 ] Display 3-123- Toner End Sen Status: Latest Output: Y...
  • Page 761 3.SP Mode Tables 3-132- Delta Vt Sum: Display ENG* [ 0 to 99 / 0 / 0.01V ] 3-200- Toner Density: Display ENG* [ 0 to 25.5 / 0 / 0.1wt% ] 3-200- Toner Density: Display ENG* [ 0 to 25.5 / 0 / 0.1wt% ] 3-200- Toner Density: Display ENG*...
  • Page 762 3.SP Mode Tables 3-206- TD Sensor Bulk Corr.: Set Offset: Y ENG* [ -2 to 2 / 0 / 0.0001g/cm3 ] 3-206- TD Sensor Bulk Corr.: Set Conversion Coeff. Beta: ENG* [ -999 to 0 / -1 / 0.1count/g/cm3 ] 3-206- TD Sensor Bulk Corr.: Set Conversion Coeff.
  • Page 763 3.SP Mode Tables 3-230- Vtref: Display/Set Current: C ENG* [ 0 to 5 / 1.5 / 0.01V ] 3-230- Vtref: Display/Set Current: M ENG* [ 0 to 5 / 1.5 / 0.01V ] 3-230- Vtref: Display/Set Current: Y ENG* [ 0 to 5 / 1.5 / 0.01V ] 3-232- Vtref Correct: Pixel: Set ON/OFF...
  • Page 764 3.SP Mode Tables 3-232- Vtref Correct: Pixel: Set TC Upper Limit: Display: ENG* [ 1 to 15 / 8.5 / 0.1wt% ] 3-232- Vtref Correct: Pixel: Set TC Upper Limit: Display: ENG* [ 1 to 15 / 8.5 / 0.1wt% ] 3-232- Vtref Correct: Pixel: Set TC Upper Limit: Display:...
  • Page 765 3.SP Mode Tables 3-250- Image Area: Display Latest: Bk ENG* [ 0 to 9999 / 0 / 1cm2 ] 3-250- Image Area: Display Latest: C ENG* [ 0 to 9999 / 0 / 1cm2 ] 3-250- Image Area: Display Latest: M ENG* [ 0 to 9999 / 0 / 1cm2 ] 3-250-...
  • Page 766 3.SP Mode Tables 3-251- Dot Coverage: Display Accumulate: Average: L: ENG* [ 0 to 100 / 5 / 0.01% ] 3-251- Dot Coverage: Display Accumulate Page: Set: S ENG* [ 1 to 255 / 5 / 1sheet ] 3-251- Dot Coverage: Display Accumulate Page: Set: M ENG* [ 1 to 500 / 10 / 1sheet ]...
  • Page 767 3.SP Mode Tables Display 1cm2 ] 3-260- Temperature/Humidity: Temperature: Display [ -5 to 45 / 0 / 0.1deg ] Display 3-260- Temperature/Humidity: Relative Humidity: [ 0 to 100 / 0 / 0.1%RH ] Display Display 3-260- Temperature/Humidity: Absolute Humidity: [ 0 to 100 / 0 / 0.01g/m3 ] Display Display 3-310-...
  • Page 768 3.SP Mode Tables 3-322- Vsg Adj. Result: Ifsg Ifsg ENG* [ 0 to 50 / 27 / 0.001mA ] 3-322- Vsg Adj. Result: Ifsg Ifsg (minimum) ENG* [ 0 to 50 / 27 / 0.001mA ] 3-322- Vsg Adj. Result: Ifsg Ifsg: TM (Front) ENG* [ 0 to 50 / 27 / 0.001mA ]...
  • Page 769 3.SP Mode Tables Coef. 3-331- ID Sen. Sensitivity Coef.: Vct_reg Check:Slope ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 0.0001V/mA ] 3-331- ID Sen. Sensitivity Coef.: Vct_reg Check:Xint ENG* [ 0 to 25.5 / 0 / 0.1mA ] 3-331- ID Sen. Sensitivity Coef.: Vct_dif Check:Slope ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 0.0001V/mA ]...
  • Page 770 3.SP Mode Tables 0.001g/sec ] 3-421- Toner Supply Ability: Set ENG* [ 0.001 to 2 / 0.469 / 0.001g/sec ] 3-421- Toner Supply Ability: Set ENG* [ 0.001 to 2 / 0.469 / 0.001g/sec ] 3-421- Toner Supply Ability: Set Coefficient 1 ENG* [ 0.5 to 2 / 1 / 0.01 ]...
  • Page 771 3.SP Mode Tables 3-421- Toner Supply Ability: Set Environment Coefficient 4 ENG* [ 0.5 to 2 / 0.96 / 0.01 ] 3-422- Toner Supply Limits: Set Max Supply Rate: Bk ENG* [ 0 to 255 / 100 / 1% ] 3-422- Toner Supply Limits: Set Max Supply Rate: C...
  • Page 772 3.SP Mode Tables 3-450- Toner Supply PID: Setting Pixel Proportion Coef. 1: ENG* [ 0 to 2.55 / 0.6 / 0.01 ] 3-450- Toner Supply PID: Setting Pixel Proportion Coef. 1: ENG* [ 0 to 2.55 / 0.6 / 0.01 ] 3-450- Toner Supply PID: Setting Pixel Proportion Coef.
  • Page 773 3.SP Mode Tables 3-450- Toner Supply PID: Setting I_Vt_Coef: Bk ENG* [ 0 to 2550 / 500 / 1 ] 3-450- Toner Supply PID: Setting I_Vt_Coef: C ENG* [ 0 to 2550 / 500 / 1 ] 3-450- Toner Supply PID: Setting I_Vt_Coef: M ENG* [ 0 to 2550 / 500 / 1 ]...
  • Page 774 3-461- Toner Supply Ctrl: DANC: PI: Line Spd Corr.: ENG* [ 0.05 to 1 / * / 0.01 ] StdSpd1: Bk *MP C307: 1 *MP C407: 0.84 3-461- Toner Supply Ctrl: DANC: PI: Line Spd Corr.: ENG* [ 0.05 to 1 / * / 0.01 ]...
  • Page 775 3.SP Mode Tables 3-462- Toner Supply Ctrl: DANC: ANC: Ratio: Std Speed 1: ENG* [ 0.05 to 1 / 1 / 0.01 ] 3-462- Toner Supply Ctrl: DANC: ANC: Ratio: Std Speed 2: ENG* [ 0.05 to 1 / 1 / 0.01 ] 3-462- Toner Supply Ctrl: DANC: ANC: Ratio: Low Speed:...
  • Page 776 3.SP Mode Tables 3-500- Image Quality Adj.: TD Sensor Initial Set ENG* [ 0 or 1 / 1 / 1 ] ON/OFF 0: OFF 1: ON 3-501- Toner End Prohibition Process Control ENG* [ 0 or 1 / 1 / 1 ] Setting 0: Permit 1: Forbid...
  • Page 777 3.SP Mode Tables 3-521- Drum Stop Time :Disp Year:Col ENG* [ 0 to 99 / 0 / 1year ] 3-521- Drum Stop Time :Disp Month:Col ENG* [ 1 to 12 / 1 / 1month ] 3-521- Drum Stop Time :Disp Day:Col ENG* [ 1 to 31 / 1 / 1day ]...
  • Page 778 3.SP Mode Tables 3-529- ProCon Auto Exe Interval: Page Counter: FC ENG* [ 0 to 5000 / 0 / 1sheet ] 3-530- Power ON ProCon: Set Non-use Time Setting ENG* [ 0 to 1440 / 360 / 1minute ] 3-530- Power ON ProCon: Set Temperature Range ENG*...
  • Page 779 3.SP Mode Tables 3-533- Interrupt ProCon: Set Interval: Set: FC ENG* [ 0 to 5000 / 200 / 1sheet ] 3-533- Interrupt ProCon: Set Interval: Display: FC ENG* [ 0 to 5000 / 200 / 1sheet ] 3-533- Interrupt ProCon: Set Correction (Short): FC ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0.25 / 0.01 ]...
  • Page 780 3.SP Mode Tables 3-539- Dev Agitating Time: Set Absolute Humidity ENG* [ 0 to 3000 / 5 / 1sec ] Reference: 5 3-539- Dev Agitating Time: Set Absolute Humidity ENG* [ 0 to 3000 / 5 / 1sec ] Reference: 6 3-539- Dev Agitating Time: Set Absolute Humidity...
  • Page 781 3.SP Mode Tables 3-539- Dev Agitating Time: Set Non-use Time Threshold: ENG* [ 0 to 30000 / 30 / 1min ] 3-539- Dev Agitating Time: Set Non-use Time Threshold: ENG* [ 0 to 30000 / 60 / 1min ] 3-539- Dev Agitating Time: Set Non-use Time Threshold: ENG*...
  • Page 782 3.SP Mode Tables 3-539- Dev Agitating Time: Set Dot Coverage Threshold: ENG* [ 0 to 100 / 60 / 1% ] 3-539- Dev Agitating Time: Set Dot Coverage Threshold: ENG* [ 0 to 100 / 80 / 1% ] 3-539- Dev Agitating Time: Set Upper Limit ENG*...
  • Page 783 3.SP Mode Tables 3-550- Refresh Mode Job End Vb Coefficient ENG* [ 0 to 100 / 34 / 1% ] 3-550- Refresh Mode Job End Length ENG* [ 0 to 99 / 77 / 1mm ] 3-550- Refresh Mode Job End Supply ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0.45 / 0.001mg/cm2 ]...
  • Page 784 3.SP Mode Tables 3-600- Select ProCon Potential Control ENG* [ 0 or 1 / 1 / 1 ] 0: FIXED 1: CONTROL 3-600- Select ProCon LD Control ENG* [ 0 to 3 / 1 / 1 ] 0: OFF 1: ON 3-600- Select ProCon TC Adj.
  • Page 785 3.SP Mode Tables Display 3-611- Charging DC Control: Mid Speed: M ENG* [ 300 to 1000 / 690 / 1-V ] Display 3-611- Charging DC Control: Mid Speed: Y ENG* [ 300 to 1000 / 690 / 1-V ] Display 3-611- Charging DC Control: Low Speed: Bk...
  • Page 786 3.SP Mode Tables 3-612- Dev DC Control: Display Low Speed: C ENG* [ 200 to 800 / 550 / 1-V ] 3-612- Dev DC Control: Display Low Speed: M ENG* [ 200 to 800 / 550 / 1-V ] 3-612- Dev DC Control: Display Low Speed: Y ENG*...
  • Page 787 3-619- Img Bias: Line Spd Corr: Set Vb Coef: Std Speed: Bk ENG* [ 0 to 2.55 / * / 0.01 ] *MP C307: 0.65 *MP C407: 0.52 3-619- Img Bias: Line Spd Corr: Set Vb Coef: Std Speed: C ENG* [ 0 to 2.55 / 1 / 0.01 ]...
  • Page 788 3-619- Img Bias: Line Spd Corr: Set Vb Coef: Low Speed: Bk ENG* [ 0 to 2.55 / * / 0.01 ] *MP C307: 0.41 *MP C407: 0.48 3-619- Img Bias: Line Spd Corr: Set Vb Coef: Low Speed: C ENG* [ 0 to 2.55 / 1 / 0.01 ]...
  • Page 789 3.SP Mode Tables 2: Bk 3-619- Img Bias: Line Spd Corr: Set Vb Coef: Mid Speed: Std ENG* [ 0 to 2.55 / 0.69 / 0.01 ] Speed 2 3-619- Img Bias: Line Spd Corr: Set Vb Coef: Low Speed: Std ENG* [ 0 to 2.55 / 0.55 / 0.01 ] Speed 2...
  • Page 790 Display 3-623- LD Power: Set Standard Speed Slope: Bk ENG* [ -1000 to 1000 / * / 1V ] *MP C307: 186 *MP C407: 228 3-623- LD Power: Set Standard Speed Slope: C ENG* [ -1000 to 1000 / * / 1V ]...
  • Page 791 3.SP Mode Tables 3-623- LD Power: Set Standard Speed Slope: Y ENG* [ -1000 to 1000 / * / 1V ] *MP C307: 186 *MP C407: 228 3-623- LD Power: Set Standard Speed Offset: Bk ENG* [ -1000 to 1000 / * / 1 ]...
  • Page 792 3.SP Mode Tables *MP C307: 144 *MP C407: 154 3-623- LD Power: Set Low Speed Slope: Y ENG* [ -1000 to 1000 / * / 1 ] *MP C307: 144 *MP C407: 154 3-623- LD Power: Set Low Speed Offset: Bk...
  • Page 793 [ 0 to 5 / 2.5 / 0.1V ] 3-627- ID Pattern Extraction: Set Edge Upper Limit ENG* [ 0 to 255 / * / 1point ] *MP C307: 34 *MP C407: 28 3-627- ID Pattern Extraction: Set Edge Upper Limit: Std ENG*...
  • Page 794 3.SP Mode Tables 3-627- ID Pattern Extraction: Set Edge Lower Limit ENG* [ 0 to 255 / * / 1point ] *MP C307: 14 *MP C407: 12 3-627- ID Pattern Extraction: Set Edge Lower Limit: Std ENG* [ 0 to 255 / 10 / 1point ]...
  • Page 795 3.SP Mode Tables 3-630- Dev gamma: Disp/Set Toner Density: C ENG* [ 0 to 25.5 / 0 / 0.1wt% ] 3-630- Dev gamma: Disp/Set Toner Density: M ENG* [ 0 to 25.5 / 0 / 0.1wt% ] 3-630- Dev gamma: Disp/Set Toner Density: Y ENG* [ 0 to 25.5 / 0 / 0.1wt% ]...
  • Page 796 3.SP Mode Tables 3-701- Manual New Unit Set # Fusing Unit ENG* [ 0 or 1 / 0 / 1 ] 3-701- Manual New Unit Set Fusing Sleeve ENG* [ 0 or 1 / 0 / 1 ] 3-701- Manual New Unit Set Pressure Roller ENG* [ 0 or 1 / 0 / 1 ]...
  • Page 797 3.SP Mode Tables Near Full 3-800- Waste Toner Full Detection Volume Count 2 After ENG* [ 0 to 1000000 / 0 / 0.1 ] Near Full 3-800- Waste Toner Full Detection Volume Count After ENG* [ 0 to 1000000 / 0 / 0.1 ] Replacement 3-800- Waste Toner Full Detection...

  • Page 798: Sp Tables - Sp4-Xxx

    3.SP Mode Tables SP Tables - SP4-XXX SP4-XXX (Scanner) SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step] 4-008- Sub Scan Magnification ENG* [ -1 to 1 / 0 / 0.1% ] Adj. 4-010- Sub Scan Registration ENG* [ -1 to 1 / 0 / 0.1mm ] Adj.
  • Page 799 3.SP Mode Tables 4-016- DF Scan Bk 600 x 600dpi Duplex Mode [ 0 or 1 / 0 / 1STEP ] 4-016- DF Scan Bk 600 x 200dpi Duplex Mode [ 0 or 1 / 0 / 1STEP ] 4-016- DF Scan FC 600 x 300dpi Simplex Mode [ 0 or 1 / 0 / 1STEP ]...
  • Page 800 3.SP Mode Tables 4-417- IPU Test Pattern Test Pattern [ 0 to 8 / 0 / 1 ] 0: Scanned image 1: Gradation main scan 2: Patch 16C 3: Grid pattern A 4: Slant grid pattern B 5: Slant grid pattern C 6: Slant grid pattern D 7: Scanned+Slant Grid 8: Scanned+Slant Grid...
  • Page 801 3.SP Mode Tables 4-501- ACC Target Den Copy:Y:Photo ENG* [ 0 to 10 / 5 / 1 ] 4-505- ACC Cor:Bright Master:K ENG* [ -128 to 127 / 0 / 1 ] 4-505- ACC Cor:Bright Master:C ENG* [ -128 to 127 / 0 / 1 ] 4-505- ACC Cor:Bright Master:M...
  • Page 802 3.SP Mode Tables 4-540- Print Coverage RY Phase: G [ -256 to 255 / 0 / 1 ] 4-540- Print Coverage RY Phase: B [ -256 to 255 / 0 / 1 ] 4-540- Print Coverage YR Phase: Option [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ] 4-540- Print Coverage YR Phase: R...
  • Page 803 3.SP Mode Tables 4-540- Print Coverage CG Phase: R [ -256 to 255 / 0 / 1 ] 4-540- Print Coverage CG Phase: G [ -256 to 255 / 0 / 1 ] 4-540- Print Coverage CG Phase: B [ -256 to 255 / 0 / 1 ] 4-540- Print Coverage CB Phase: Option...
  • Page 804 3.SP Mode Tables 4-540- Print Coverage MR Phase: Option [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ] 4-540- Print Coverage MR Phase: R [ -256 to 255 / 0 / 1 ] 4-540- Print Coverage MR Phase: G [ -256 to 255 / 0 / 1 ] 4-540- Print Coverage MR Phase: B...
  • Page 805 3.SP Mode Tables 4-550- Scan Apli:Txt/Print Brightness: 1-255 [ 1 to 255 / 128 / 1 ] 4-550- Scan Apli:Txt/Print Contrast: 1-255 [ 1 to 255 / 128 / 1 ] 4-550- Scan Apli:Txt/Print Ind Dot Erase: 0(Off) 1-7 [ 0 to 7 / 0 / 1 ] (Weak-Strong) 4-551- Scan Apli:Txt...
  • Page 806 3.SP Mode Tables 4-554- Scan Apli:Photo Smoothing: 0(x1) 1-7 (Weak- [ 0 to 7 / 4 / 1 ] Strong) 4-554- Scan Apli:Photo Brightness: 1-255 [ 1 to 255 / 128 / 1 ] 4-554- Scan Apli:Photo Contrast: 1-255 [ 1 to 255 / 128 / 1 ] 4-554- Scan Apli:Photo Ind Dot Erase: 0(Off) 1-7...
  • Page 807 3.SP Mode Tables 4-572- Scan Apli:AutoCol MTF: 0(Off) 1-15 (Weak- [ 0 to 15 / 8 / 1 ] Strong) 4-572- Scan Apli:AutoCol Smoothing: 0(x1) 1-7 (Weak- [ 0 to 7 / 4 / 1 ] Strong) 4-572- Scan Apli:AutoCol Brightness: 1-255 [ 1 to 255 / 128 / 1 ] 4-572-...
  • Page 808 3.SP Mode Tables 4-582- Fax Apli:Txt/Photo Contrast: 1-255 [ 1 to 255 / 128 / 1 ] 4-582- Fax Apli:Txt/Photo Ind Dot Erase: 0(Off) 1-7 [ 0 to 7 / 0 / 1 ] (Weak-Strong) 4-582- Fax Apli:Txt/Photo Texture Erase: 0 [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1 ] 4-583- Fax Apli:Photo...
  • Page 809 3.SP Mode Tables 4-600- SCN Version Display SCN ID [ 0x00 to 0xFF / 0 / 1 ] 4-609- Gray Balance Set: R Book Scan ENG* [ -384 to 255 / -100 / 1digit ] 4-609- Gray Balance Set: R DF Scan ENG* [ -384 to 255 / -100 /...
  • Page 810 3.SP Mode Tables 4-745- CIS Scan Adjust Error Black level [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 1 ] 4-746- CIS GB Adj Error Flag [ 0 to 7 / 0 / 1 ] 4-747- CIS Scanner Hard Error Power-ON [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 1 ] 4-785- CIS White Level Peak...
  • Page 811 3.SP Mode Tables 4-902- Disp ACC Data B_DATA1 ENG* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ] 4-902- Disp ACC Data R_DATA2 ENG* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ] 4-902- Disp ACC Data G_DATA2 ENG* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ] 4-902- Disp ACC Data B_DATA2...
  • Page 812 3.SP Mode Tables 4-938- ACS:Edge Mask Copy:Sub LEdge ENG* [ 0 to 31 / 10 / 1mm ] 4-938- ACS:Edge Mask Copy:Sub TEdge ENG* [ 0 to 31 / 10 / 1mm ] 4-938- ACS:Edge Mask Copy:Main LEdge ENG* [ 0 to 31 / 10 / 1mm ] 4-938- ACS:Edge Mask Copy:Main TEdge...

  • Page 813: Sp Tables - Sp5-Xxx

    3.SP Mode Tables SP Tables - SP5-XXX SP5-XXX (Engine: Mode) SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step] 5-131- Paper Size Type ENG* [ 0 to 2 / * / 1 ] Selection *NA: 1 *EU, AA, CHN, TWN, KOR: 2 0: JP 1: NA...

  • Page 814: Sp5-Xxx (Controller: Mode)

    3.SP Mode Tables 4: Taiwan 5: Asia 6: China 7: Korea 5-810- Fusing SC Reset Fusing SC Reset [ 0 or 1 / 0 / 1 ] 5-810- Fusing SC Reset Hard High Temp. [ 0 or 1 / 0 / 1 ] Detection 5-811- Machine Serial...
  • Page 815 3.SP Mode Tables Add display language 33-40 CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ] 009- Add display language 41-48 CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ] 009- Add display language 49-56 CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ] 009- mm/inch Display Selection 0:mm 1:inch...
  • Page 816 3.SP Mode Tables 062- Display Part Replacement Alert #Paper Transfer Roller Unit CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ] 062- Display Part Replacement Alert #Fusing Unit CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ] 062- Display Part Replacement Alert Fusing Sleeve...
  • Page 817 3.SP Mode Tables Part Replacement Operation #PCU:Y CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ] 067- Type Part Replacement Operation #Image Transfer Belt Unit CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ] 067- Type Part Replacement Operation #Paper Transfer Roller Unit CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]...
  • Page 818 3.SP Mode Tables Home Key Customization Function Setting CTL* [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1 ] 074- Home Key Customization Product ID CTL* [ 0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1 ] 074- Home Key Customization Application Screen ID CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ] 074-...
  • Page 819 3.SP Mode Tables 2: Expansion Device 2 3: Expansion Device 3 Optional Counter I/F MF Key Card Extension CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ] 114- 0: Not installed / 1: Installed (scanning accounting) Disable Copying CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ] 118- 0: Enabled, 1: Disabled...
  • Page 820 3.SP Mode Tables Page Numbering Duplex Printout Top/Bottom CTL* [ -10 to 10 / 0 / 0.01mm ] 212- Position of Left/Right Facing Page Numbering Duplex Printout Left/Right CTL* [ -10 to 10 / 0 / 0.01mm ] 212- Position of Top/Bottom Facing Page Numbering Duplex Printout Top/Bottom CTL*...
  • Page 821 3.SP Mode Tables Access Control Authentication Time CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1sec ] 401- Access Control Extend Certification Detail CTL* [ 0 to 0xff / 0 / 1 ] 401- Access Control SDK1 UniqueID CTL* [ 0 to 0xFFFFFFFF / 0 / 401- Access Control SDK1 Certification Method...
  • Page 822 3.SP Mode Tables Access Control SDKJ4 Limit Setting CTL* [ 0 to 0xFF / 0 / 1 ] 402- Access Control SDKJ5 Limit Setting CTL* [ 0 to 0xFF / 0 / 1 ] 402- Access Control SDKJ6 Limit Setting CTL* [ 0 to 0xFF / 0 / 1 ] 402-...
  • Page 823 3.SP Mode Tables Access Control SDKJ17 Limit Setting CTL* [ 0 to 0xFF / 0 / 1 ] 402- Access Control SDKJ18 Limit Setting CTL* [ 0 to 0xFF / 0 / 1 ] 402- Access Control SDKJ19 Limit Setting CTL* [ 0 to 0xFF / 0 / 1 ] 402-...
  • Page 824 3.SP Mode Tables Access Control SDKJ30 Limit Setting CTL* [ 0 to 0xFF / 0 / 1 ] 402- Access Control SDKJ1 ProductID CTL* [ 0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1 ] 402- Access Control SDKJ2 ProductID CTL* [ 0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1 ] 402- Access Control SDKJ3 ProductID...
  • Page 825 3.SP Mode Tables Access Control SDKJ13 ProductID CTL* [ 0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1 ] 402- Access Control SDKJ14 ProductID CTL* [ 0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1 ] 402- Access Control SDKJ15 ProductID CTL* [ 0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1 ] 402- Access Control SDKJ16 ProductID...
  • Page 826 3.SP Mode Tables Access Control SDKJ26 ProductID CTL* [ 0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1 ] 402- Access Control SDKJ27 ProductID CTL* [ 0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1 ] 402- Access Control SDKJ28 ProductID CTL* [ 0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1 ] 402- Access Control SDKJ29 ProductID...
  • Page 827 3.SP Mode Tables 413- Lockout Setting Cancelation On/Off CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ] 413- 0: Off, 1: On Lockout Setting Cancelation Time CTL* [ 1 to 9999 / 60 / 1min ] 413- Access Mitigation Mitigation On/Off CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]...
  • Page 828 3.SP Mode Tables Access Attack Attack Max Num CTL* [ 50 to 200 / 200 / 1 ] 417- User Authentication Copy CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ] 420- 0: On, 1: Off User Authentication Color Security Setting CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ] 420-...
  • Page 829 3.SP Mode Tables Auth Dialog Message Change Message Text ID [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ] 430- External Auth User Preset CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ] 431- External Auth User Preset Entry CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ] 431-...
  • Page 830 3.SP Mode Tables External Auth User Preset DocumentAcl CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ] 431- External Auth User Preset CertCrypt CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ] 431- External Auth User Preset UserLimitCount CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ] 431-...
  • Page 831 3.SP Mode Tables 505- Error Alarm Threshold CTL* [ 1 to 99 / 5 / 1 ] 505- Supply/CC Alarm Paper Supply Alarm CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ] 507- 0: Off, 1: On Supply/CC Alarm Toner Supply Alarm CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ]...
  • Page 832 3.SP Mode Tables CC Call Jam Remains CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ] 508- 0: Disable, 1: Enable CC Call Continuous Jams CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ] 508- 0: Disable, 1: Enable CC Call Continuous Door Open CTL*...
  • Page 833 3.SP Mode Tables SC/Alarm Setting Non Genuine Tonner Ararm CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ] 515- SC/Alarm Setting Supply Automatic Ordering Call CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ] 515- SC/Alarm Setting Supply Management Report CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ] 515-...
  • Page 834 3.SP Mode Tables Network Setting NAT Machine Port1 CTL* [ 1 to 65535 / 49101 / 1 ] 728- Network Setting NAT UI Port1 CTL* [ 1 to 65535 / 55101 / 1 ] 728- Network Setting NAT Machine Port2 CTL* [ 1 to 65535 / 49102 / 1 ] 728-...
  • Page 835 3.SP Mode Tables Network Setting NAT UI Port7 CTL* [ 1 to 65535 / 55107 / 1 ] 728- Network Setting NAT Machine Port8 CTL* [ 1 to 65535 / 49108 / 1 ] 728- Network Setting NAT UI Port8 CTL* [ 1 to 65535 / 55108 / 1 ] 728-...
  • Page 836 3.SP Mode Tables Network Setting PacketCapture:portnumber [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 1 ] 728- Network Setting PacketCapture:time [ 0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1 ] 728- Extended Function Setting JavaTM Platform setting CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ] 730- 0: Disable 1: Enable Extended Function Setting...
  • Page 837 3.SP Mode Tables DeemedPowerConsumption Engine Standby CTL* [ 0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 ] 745- DeemedPowerConsumption Low Power Consumption CTL* [ 0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 ] 745- DeemedPowerConsumption Silent condition CTL* [ 0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 ] 745- DeemedPowerConsumption Heater Off...
  • Page 838 Rev. 01/30/2017 3.SP Mode Tables SmartOperationPanel Setting Restore the default Home screen CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ] 761- Memory Clear All Clear [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ] 801- Memory Clear [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ] 801- Memory Clear IMH Memory Clr...
  • Page 839 3.SP Mode Tables Memory Clear [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ] 801- Memory Clear R-FAX [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ] 801- Memory Clear Clear DCS Setting [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ] 801- Memory Clear Clear UCS Setting...
  • Page 840 3.SP Mode Tables Memory Clear [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ] 801- Memory Clear Rest WebService [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ] 801- Service Tel. No. Setting Service CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ] 812- Service Tel.
  • Page 841 3.SP Mode Tables Remote Service Port 80 Enable CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ] 816- Remote Service RFU Timing CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ] 816- Remote Service RCG Error Cause CTL* [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1 ] 816- Remote Service...
  • Page 842 3.SP Mode Tables Remote Service CERT:Up ID CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ] 816- Remote Service Firm Up Status CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ] 816- Remote Service Firm Up User Check CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ] 816-...
  • Page 843 3.SP Mode Tables Remote Service Client Communication Method CTL* [ 0 to 3 / 0 / 1 ] 816- 1: IPv4 2: IPv6 3: Hostname Remote Service Client Communication Limit CTL* [ 1 to 7 / 7 / 1 ] 816- Remote Service Network Information Waiting...
  • Page 844 3.SP Mode Tables Remote Service Access Point CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ] 816- Remote Service Line Connecting CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ] 816- Remote Service Modem Serial No. CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ] 816- Remote Service Retransmission Limit...
  • Page 845 3.SP Mode Tables 816- Remote Service Register Execute [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ] 816- Remote Service Register Result [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ] 816- Remote Service Error Code [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ] 816- Remote Service Instl Clear...
  • Page 846 3.SP Mode Tables Remote Service Other Err Count CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ] 816- Remote Service CommLog Print [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ] 816- Remote Service RCG Setting RCG IPv4 Address CTL* [ 0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1 ] 821-...
  • Page 847 3.SP Mode Tables Network Setting 1284 Compatiblity (Centro) CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ] 828- Network Setting ECP (Centro) CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ] 828- Network Setting Job Spooling CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ] 828- 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Network Setting...
  • Page 848 3.SP Mode Tables Network Setting Active IPv6 Stateless Address 5 [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ] 828- Network Setting IPv6 Manual Address CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ] 828- Network Setting IPv6 Gateway Address CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ] 828-...
  • Page 849 3.SP Mode Tables 828- Network Setting Web Link2 visible CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ] 828- Network Setting DHCPv6 DUID CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ] 828- HDD Formatting (ALL) [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ] 832- HDD Formatting (IMH) [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]...
  • Page 850 3.SP Mode Tables HDD Formatting (Ridoc I/F) [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ] 832- HDD Formatting (Thumbnail) [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ] 832- Capture Setting Capture Function (0:Off 1:On) CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ] 836- Capture Setting Capture Setting: Copy...
  • Page 851 3.SP Mode Tables Capture Setting Reduction for Copy B&W CTL* [ 0 to 6 / 0 / 1 ] 836- Other 0: 1to-1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4, 6: 2/3 Capture Setting Reduction for Printer Color CTL* [ 0 to 3 / 2 / 1 ] 836- 0: 1to-1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: Capture Setting...
  • Page 852 3.SP Mode Tables Capture Setting Primary srv scheme CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ] 836- Capture Setting Primary srv port number CTL* [ 1 to 65535 / 80 / 1 ] 836- Capture Setting Primary srv URL path CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ] 836-...
  • Page 853 3.SP Mode Tables 836- Capture Setting Reso: Fax(Mono) CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 3 / 1 ] 836- 0: 600dpi/ 1: 400dpi/ 2: 300dpi/ 3: 200dpi/ 4: 150dpi/ 5: 100dpi/ 6: 75dpi Capture Setting Reso: Scan(Color) CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 4 / 1 ] 836- 0: 600dpi/ 1: 400dpi/ 2: 300dpi/ 3: 200dpi/ 4:...
  • Page 854 3.SP Mode Tables 840- IEEE 802.11 WPA Debug Lvl CTL* [ 1 to 3 / 3 / 1 ] 840- 1: Info, 2: warning, 3: error IEEE 802.11 CTL* [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1 ] 840- IEEE 802.11 PSK Set Type CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]...
  • Page 855 3.SP Mode Tables Device Release Number CTL* [ 0 to 9999 / 100 / 1 ] 844- Fixed USB Port CTL* [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1 ] 844- PnP Model Name CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ] 844- PnP Serial Number CTL*...
  • Page 856 3.SP Mode Tables Delivery Server Setting Delivery Svr. Capability CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ] 845- Delivery Server Setting Delivery Svr. Capability (Ext) CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ] 845- Delivery Server Setting Server Scheme(Primary) CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]...
  • Page 857 3.SP Mode Tables UCS Setting Delivery Server Retry Times CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ] 846- UCS Setting Delivery Server Maximum CTL* [ 2000 to 20000 / 2000 / 846- Entries UCS Setting LDAP Search Timeout CTL* [ 1 to 255 / 60 / 1 ] 846-...
  • Page 858 3.SP Mode Tables 846- UCS Setting Backup All Addr Book [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ] 846- UCS Setting Restore All Addr Book [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ] 846- UCS Setting Clear Backup Info [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ] 846- UCS Setting...
  • Page 859 3.SP Mode Tables 1/6x 5: 1/8x 6: 2/3x Rep Resolution Reduction Rate for Copy B&W Other CTL* [ 0 to 6 / 0 / 1 ] 847- 0: 1x 1: 1/2x 2: 1/3x 3: 1/4x 4: 1/6x 5: 1/8x 6: 2/3x Rep Resolution Reduction Rate for Printer Color CTL*...
  • Page 860 3.SP Mode Tables Web Service Access Ctrl: CTL* [ 0x00 to 0xFF / 0x00 / 848- Devicemanagement(Lower 4bits) Web Service Access Ctrl: Delivery (Lower CTL* [ 0x00 to 0xFF / 0x00 / 848- 4bits) Web Service Access Ctrl: uadministration CTL* [ 0x00 to 0xFF / 0x00 / 848- (Lower 4bits)
  • Page 861 3.SP Mode Tables Stamp Data Download CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ] 853- Remote ROM Update Local Port [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ] 856- 0: Disable, 1: Enable Collect Machine Info 0:OFF 1:ON CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ] 858-...
  • Page 862 3.SP Mode Tables Collect Machine Info Acquire Fax Info CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 0 ] 858- Collect Machine Info Acquire All Debug Logs CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 0 ] 858- Collect Machine Info Acquire Controller Debug Logs CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 0 ]...
  • Page 863 3.SP Mode Tables 860- 0: Check, 1: No check E-Mail Report Report Validity [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ] 866- E-Mail Report Add Date Field [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ] 866- E-Mail Report CounterE-Mail:Validity [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ] 866-...
  • Page 864 3.SP Mode Tables Common KeyInfo Writing Initialize [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ] 870- Common Key Info Writing Writing: 2048bit [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ] 870- SDCardAppliMove MoveExec [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 1 ] 873- SDCardAppliMove UndoExec...
  • Page 865 3.SP Mode Tables Set WIM Function Set Signature CTL* [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1 ] 885- Set WIM Function Set Encrypsion CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ] 885- Set WIM Function Detect Mem Leak CTL* [ 0x00 to 0xFF / 0x00 / 885-...
  • Page 866 3.SP Mode Tables Farm Update Setting Auto Update @Remote Using CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ] 886- Setting Farm Update Setting Auto Update Prohibit Day of CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ] 886- Week Setting Farm Update Setting...
  • Page 867 3.SP Mode Tables SDK Application Counter SDK-8 [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ] 893- SDK Application Counter SDK-9 [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ] 893- SDK Application Counter SDK-10 [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ] 893- SDK Application Counter SDK-11...
  • Page 868 3.SP Mode Tables SP Print Mode All (Data List) [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 0 ] 990- SP Print Mode SP (Mode Data List) [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 0 ] 990- SP Print Mode User Program [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 0 ] 990- SP Print Mode...
  • Page 869 3.SP Mode Tables SP Print Mode Printer SP [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 0 ] 990- SP Print Mode SmartOperationPanel SP [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 0 ] 990- SP Print Mode SmartOperationPanel UP [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 0 ] 990- SP Text Mode All (Data List)
  • Page 870 3.SP Mode Tables SP Text Mode Scanner User Program [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ] 992- SP Text Mode SDK/J Summary [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ] 992- SP Text Mode SDK/J Application Info [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ] 992- SP Text Mode...

  • Page 871: Sp Tables - Sp6-Xxx

    3.SP Mode Tables SP Tables - SP6-XXX SP6-XXX (Peripherals) Engine SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step] 6-006- ADF Adjustment Side-to-Side Regist:Face ENG* [ -3 to 3 / 0 / 0.1mm ] 6-006- ADF Adjustment Side-to-Side Regist (1- ENG* [ -2 to 2 / 0 / 0.1mm ] Pass):Back...
  • Page 872 3.SP Mode Tables Controller 6800 [Sheet Conversion (Thick Paper)] Not used 6-800-001 1 to 3 (Initial: 3 Sheets) [1 to 3 / 3 / 1/step] 6810 [Ring Bind Sheet Conversion (Thick Paper)] Not used 6-810-001 [1 to 3 / 3 / 1/step] 6830 [Extra] Not used...

  • Page 873: Sp Tables - Sp7-Xxx

    3.SP Mode Tables SP Tables - SP7-XXX SP7-XXX (Engine: Data Log) SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step] 7-621- PM Counter Display: # PCU:Bk [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / Pages 1page ] 7-621- PM Counter Display: # Dev Unit:Bk ENG* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 /...
  • Page 874 3.SP Mode Tables Pages 1page ] 7-621- PM Counter Display: #Friction Pad:Tray1 [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / Pages 1page ] 7-621- PM Counter Display: #Feed Roller:Bypass [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / Pages 1page ] 7-621- PM Counter Display: DF Friction Pad [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / Pages...
  • Page 875 3.SP Mode Tables 7-622- PM Counter Clear Tray1 Roller Assembly [ 0 or 1 / 0 / 1 ] 7-622- PM Counter Clear #Paper Feed Roller:Tray1 [ 0 or 1 / 0 / 1 ] 7-622- PM Counter Clear #Friction Pad:Tray1 [ 0 or 1 / 0 / 1 ] 7-622- PM Counter Clear...
  • Page 876 3.SP Mode Tables Pages 1page ] 7-623- PM Value Setting: Life # PCU:M [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / Pages 1page ] 7-623- PM Value Setting: Life # Dev Unit:M [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / Pages 1page ] 7-623- PM Value Setting: Life # PCU:Y...
  • Page 877 3.SP Mode Tables Pages 1page ] 7-625- Previous Unit Counter: # PCU:M [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / Pages 1page ] 7-625- Previous Unit Counter: # Dev Unit:M [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / Pages 1page ] 7-625- Previous Unit Counter: # PCU:Y [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 /...
  • Page 878 3.SP Mode Tables Pages 1page ] 7-626- Previous Unit Counter2: # Dev Unit:Bk [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / Pages 1page ] 7-626- Previous Unit Counter2: # PCU:C [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / Pages 1page ] 7-626- Previous Unit Counter2: # Dev Unit:C [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 /...
  • Page 879 3.SP Mode Tables 7-700- Accum Cvrg 1 img ENG* [ 0 to 400000000 / 0 / Process.:Disp 0.1% ] 7-700- Accum Cvrg 1 img ENG* [ 0 to 400000000 / 0 / Process.:Disp 0.1% ] 7-700- Accum Cvrg 1 img ENG* [ 0 to 400000000 / 0 / Process.:Disp...
  • Page 880 3.SP Mode Tables 7-801- Firmware Version Engine [ - / - / - ] 7-801- Firmware Version [ - / - / - ] 7-801- Firmware Version PFU2 [ - / - / - ] 7-852- DF Glass Dust Check Dust Detection Counter ENG* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 1 ]...
  • Page 881 3.SP Mode Tables 7-853- Replace Counter Pressure Roller [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ] 7-853- Replace Counter #Waste Toner bottle [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ] 7-906- Previous Unit # PCU:Bk [ 0 to 4294967295 / 0 / Counter:Distance 1mm ] 7-906-...
  • Page 882 3.SP Mode Tables Counter:Distance 7-906- Previous Unit Toner Sub Hopper:Y [ 0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 ] Counter:Distance 7-906- Previous Unit Low Speed: # PCU:Bk [ 0 to 4294967295 / 0 / Counter:Distance 1mm ] 7-906- Previous Unit Low Speed: # PCU:C [ 0 to 4294967295 / 0 / Counter:Distance...
  • Page 883 3.SP Mode Tables Cntr:Distance(%) 7-907- Previous Unit # ITB Cleaning Unit [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1% ] Cntr:Distance(%) 7-907- Previous Unit # PTR Unit [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1% ] Cntr:Distance(%) 7-907- Previous Unit # Fusing Unit [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1% ] Cntr:Distance(%)
  • Page 884 3.SP Mode Tables Counter:Pages(%) 7-908- Previous Unit #Waste Toner bottle [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1% ] Counter:Pages(%) 7-908- Previous Unit Tray1 Roller Assembly [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1% ] Counter:Pages(%) 7-908- Previous Unit #Paper Feed Roller:Tray1 [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1% ] Counter:Pages(%) 7-908-...
  • Page 885 3.SP Mode Tables 7-931- Toner Bottle Bk Refill Information ENG* [ - / - / - ] 7-931- Toner Bottle Bk Attachment: Total Counter ENG* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 7-931- Toner Bottle Bk Attachment: Color Counter ENG* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 7-931-...
  • Page 886 3.SP Mode Tables 7-932- Toner Bottle M EDP Code ENG* [ - / - / - ] 7-932- Toner Bottle M End History ENG* [ - / - / - ] 7-932- Toner Bottle M Refill Information ENG* [ - / - / - ] 7-932- Toner Bottle M Attachment: Total Counter...
  • Page 887 3.SP Mode Tables 7-933- Toner Bottle C SerialNo. ENG* [ - / - / - ] 7-933- Toner Bottle C Toner Remaining ENG* [ 0 to 100 / 100 / 1% ] 7-933- Toner Bottle C EDP Code ENG* [ - / - / - ] 7-933- Toner Bottle C End History...
  • Page 888 3.SP Mode Tables 7-934- Toner Bottle Y Recycle Counter ENG* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ] 7-934- Toner Bottle Y Date ENG* [ - / - / - ] 7-934- Toner Bottle Y SerialNo. ENG* [ - / - / - ] 7-934- Toner Bottle Y Toner Remaining...
  • Page 889 3.SP Mode Tables 7-935- Toner Bottle Log 2: Bk Attachment: Total Counter [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 7-935- Toner Bottle Log 2: Bk Refill Information ENG* [ - / - / - ] 7-935- Toner Bottle Log 3: Bk SerialNo.
  • Page 890 3.SP Mode Tables 7-936- Toner Bottle Log 2: M Attachment Date [ - / - / - ] 7-936- Toner Bottle Log 2: M Attachment: Total Counter [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 7-936- Toner Bottle Log 2: M Refill Information ENG* [ - / - / - ]...
  • Page 891 3.SP Mode Tables 7-937- Toner Bottle Log 2: C SerialNo. [ - / - / - ] 7-937- Toner Bottle Log 2: C Attachment Date [ - / - / - ] 7-937- Toner Bottle Log 2: C Attachment: Total Counter [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 7-937- Toner Bottle Log 2: C...
  • Page 892 3.SP Mode Tables 7-938- Toner Bottle Log 1: Y Refill Information ENG* [ - / - / - ] 7-938- Toner Bottle Log 2: Y SerialNo. [ - / - / - ] 7-938- Toner Bottle Log 2: Y Attachment Date [ - / - / - ] 7-938- Toner Bottle Log 2: Y...
  • Page 893 3.SP Mode Tables Distance 1mm ] 7-940- PM Value Setting:Life # PCU:C [ 0 to 999999999 / 0 / Distance 1mm ] 7-940- PM Value Setting:Life # Dev Unit:C [ 0 to 999999999 / 0 / Distance 1mm ] 7-940- PM Value Setting:Life # PCU:M [ 0 to 999999999 / 0 /...
  • Page 894 3.SP Mode Tables Display:Distance(%) 7-942- PM Counter # Dev Unit:Y [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1% ] Display:Distance(%) 7-942- PM Counter # ITB Unit [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1% ] Display:Distance(%) 7-942- PM Counter # ITB Cleaning Unit [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1% ] Display:Distance(%) 7-942-...
  • Page 895 3.SP Mode Tables Distance 1mm ] 7-944- PM Counter Display: Fusing Sleeve [ 0 to 4294967295 / 0 / Distance 1mm ] 7-944- PM Counter Display: Pressure Roller [ 0 to 4294967295 / 0 / Distance 1mm ] 7-944- PM Counter Display: Toner Sub Hopper:Bk [ 0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 ] Distance...
  • Page 896 3.SP Mode Tables 7-950- Unit Replacement Date # Dev Unit:C ENG* [ - / - / - ] 7-950- Unit Replacement Date # PCU:M ENG* [ - / - / - ] 7-950- Unit Replacement Date # Dev Unit:M ENG* [ - / - / - ] 7-950- Unit Replacement Date...
  • Page 897 3.SP Mode Tables Pages 7-951- Remain Day Counter: # Dev Unit:C [ 0 to 255 / 255 / 1day ] Pages 7-951- Remain Day Counter: # PCU:M [ 0 to 255 / 255 / 1day ] Pages 7-951- Remain Day Counter: # Dev Unit:M [ 0 to 255 / 255 / 1day ] Pages...
  • Page 898 3.SP Mode Tables Distance 7-952- Remain Day Counter: # Dev Unit:C [ 0 to 255 / 255 / 1day ] Distance 7-952- Remain Day Counter: # PCU:M [ 0 to 255 / 255 / 1day ] Distance 7-952- Remain Day Counter: # Dev Unit:M [ 0 to 255 / 255 / 1day ] Distance...
  • Page 899 3.SP Mode Tables 1mm ] 7-953- Operation Env. Log: PCU: 15<=T<25:0<=H<30 [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1mm ] 7-953- Operation Env. Log: PCU: 15<=T<25:30<=H<55 [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1mm ] 7-953- Operation Env. Log: PCU: 15<=T<25:55<=H<80 [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1mm ]...
  • Page 900 3.SP Mode Tables Pages (%) 7-954- PM Counter Display: # Dev Unit:M [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1% ] Pages (%) 7-954- PM Counter Display: # PCU:Y [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1% ] Pages (%) 7-954- PM Counter Display: # Dev Unit:Y...
  • Page 901 3.SP Mode Tables Setting:DaysThreshold 7-958- PM Value # Dev Unit:M [ 1 to 30 / 15 / 1day ] Setting:DaysThreshold 7-958- PM Value # PCU:Y [ 1 to 30 / 15 / 1day ] Setting:DaysThreshold 7-958- PM Value # Dev Unit:Y [ 1 to 30 / 15 / 1day ] Setting:DaysThreshold 7-958-...
  • Page 902 3.SP Mode Tables 0x0000 / 1 ] 7-979- CPU Reset Log Data6 ENG* [ 0x0000 to 0xFFFF / 0x0000 / 1 ] 7-979- CPU Reset Log Data7 ENG* [ 0x0000 to 0xFFFF / 0x0000 / 1 ] 7-979- CPU Reset Log Data8 ENG* [ 0x0000 to 0xFFFF /...

  • Page 903: Sp7-Xxx (Controller: Data Log)

    3.SP Mode Tables SP7-XXX (Controller: Data Log) SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step] 7-401- Total SC SC Counter CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ] 7-401- Total SC Total SC Counter CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ] 7-403- SC History...
  • Page 904 3.SP Mode Tables 7-404- Software Error History Latest 6 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ] 7-404- Software Error History Latest 7 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ] 7-404- Software Error History Latest 8 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ] 7-404-...
  • Page 905 3.SP Mode Tables 7-504- Paper Jam Location 1bin: Exit Sensor: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ] 7-504- Paper Jam Location Duplex Exit : On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ] 7-504- Paper Jam Location Duplex Entrance: On CTL*...
  • Page 906 3.SP Mode Tables 7-506- Jam Count by Paper Size A5 SEF CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ] 7-506- Jam Count by Paper Size B5 SEF CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ] 7-506- Jam Count by Paper Size LG SEF CTL*...
  • Page 907 3.SP Mode Tables 7-508- Original Jam History Latest 3 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ] 7-508- Original Jam History Latest 4 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ] 7-508- Original Jam History Latest 5 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ] 7-508-...
  • Page 908 3.SP Mode Tables 7-514- Paper Jam Count by Location Duplex Exit : On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ] 7-514- Paper Jam Count by Location Duplex Entrance: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ] 7-514- Paper Jam Count by Location Bank Transport1: Off...
  • Page 909 3.SP Mode Tables 7-516- Paper Size Jam Count B5 SEF CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ] 7-516- Paper Size Jam Count LG SEF CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ] 7-516- Paper Size Jam Count LT SEF CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]...
  • Page 910 3.SP Mode Tables 7-520- Update Log Auto:StartDate5 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ] 7-520- Update Log Auto:EndDate1 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ] 7-520- Update Log Auto:EndDate2 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ] 7-520- Update Log Auto:EndDate3...
  • Page 911 3.SP Mode Tables 7-520- Update Log Auto:Result4 CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ] 7-520- Update Log Auto:Result5 CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ] 7-520- Update Log Auto:Result6 CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ] 7-520- Update Log Auto:Result7...
  • Page 912 3.SP Mode Tables ON/OFF 7-624- Part Replacement Operation Pressure Roller CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ] ON/OFF 7-624- Part Replacement Operation #Wast Toner bottle CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ] ON/OFF 7-624- Part Replacement Operation #Paper Feed CTL*...
  • Page 913 3.SP Mode Tables Hist 7-840- ServiceSP Entry Code Chg Initialize Time :Last1 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ] Hist 7-855- Coverage Range Coverage Range 1 CTL* [ 1 to 200 / 5 / 1% ] 7-855- Coverage Range Coverage Range 2 CTL*...
  • Page 914 3.SP Mode Tables 7-910- ROM No CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ] 7-910- ROM No RTIFF CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ] 7-910- ROM No CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ] 7-910- ROM No PCLXL...
  • Page 915 3.SP Mode Tables 7-910- ROM No Factory CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ] 7-910- ROM No Copy CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ] 7-910- ROM No NetworkDocBox CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ] 7-910- ROM No CTL*...
  • Page 916 3.SP Mode Tables 7-911- Firmware Version Bank2 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ] 7-911- Firmware Version BIOS CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ] 7-911- Firmware Version HDD Format Option CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ] 7-911- Firmware Version RPCS...
  • Page 917 3.SP Mode Tables 7-911- Firmware Version FONT CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ] 7-911- Firmware Version FONT1 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ] 7-911- Firmware Version FONT2 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ] 7-911- Firmware Version FONT3...
  • Page 918 3.SP Mode Tables 7-911- Firmware Version SDK2 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ] 7-911- Firmware Version SDK3 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ] 7-911- Firmware Version Package CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]...

  • Page 919: Remarks

    3.SP Mode Tables SP Tables - SP8-XXX (1) Remarks Many of these counters are provided for features that are currently not available, such as sending color faxes, and so on. However, here are some Group 8 codes that when used in combination with others, can provide useful information.
  • Page 920 3.SP Mode Tables Key for Abbreviations "By", e.g. "T:Jobs/Apl" = Total Jobs "by" Application > More (2> "2 or more", 4> "4 or more" AddBook Address Book Application Black & White Black Cyan ColCr Color Create ColMode Color Mode Comb Combine Comp Compression...

  • Page 921: Sp8-Xxx (Data Log2) -1

    3.SP Mode Tables evenly among the printers on the network, and allows files to moved around, combined, and converted to different formats. Personal Computer Pages. A page is the total scanned surface of the original. Duplex pages count as two pages, and A3 simplex count as two pages if the A3/DLT counter SP is switched ON.
  • Page 922 3.SP Mode Tables 8-011-001 T:Jobs/LS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-012-001 C:Jobs/LS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-013-001 F:Jobs/LS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-014-001 P:Jobs/LS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]...
  • Page 923 3.SP Mode Tables 8-061-004 T:FIN Jobs Booklet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-061-005 T:FIN Jobs Z-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-061-006 T:FIN Jobs Punch CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-061-007 T:FIN Jobs Other...
  • Page 924 3.SP Mode Tables 8-063-010 F:FIN Jobs Three-OUT-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-063-011 F:FIN Jobs Four-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-063-012 F:FIN Jobs KANNON-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-063-013 F:FIN Jobs Perfect-Bind...
  • Page 925 3.SP Mode Tables 8-065-016 S:FIN Jobs TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-066-001 L:FIN Jobs Sort CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-066-002 L:FIN Jobs Stack CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-066-003 L:FIN Jobs Staple...
  • Page 926 3.SP Mode Tables 8-071-006 T:Jobs/PGS 6~10 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-071-007 T:Jobs/PGS 11~20 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-071-008 T:Jobs/PGS 21~50 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-071-009 T:Jobs/PGS 51~100 Pages...
  • Page 927 3.SP Mode Tables 8-074-002 P:Jobs/PGS 2 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-074-003 P:Jobs/PGS 3 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-074-004 P:Jobs/PGS 4 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-074-005 P:Jobs/PGS 5 Pages...
  • Page 928 3.SP Mode Tables 8-076-012 L:Jobs/PGS 501~700 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-076-013 L:Jobs/PGS 701~1000 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-076-014 L:Jobs/PGS 1001~ Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-077-001 O:Jobs/PGS 1 Page...
  • Page 929 3.SP Mode Tables 8-135-002 S:S-to-Email Jobs Color CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-135-003 S:S-to-Email Jobs CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-141-001 T:Deliv Jobs/Svr CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-141-002 T:Deliv Jobs/Svr Color...
  • Page 930 3.SP Mode Tables 8-213-001 F:Scan PGS/LS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-215-001 S:Scan PGS/LS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-216-001 L:Scan PGS/LS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-221-001 ADF Org Feeds Front...
  • Page 931 3.SP Mode Tables 8-245-008 S:Scan PGS/Org Binary CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-245-009 S:Scan PGS/Org Grayscale CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-245-010 S:Scan PGS/Org Color CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-245-011 S:Scan PGS/Org Other...
  • Page 932 3.SP Mode Tables 8-301-003 T:Scan PGS/Size CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-301-004 T:Scan PGS/Size CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-301-005 T:Scan PGS/Size CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-301-006 T:Scan PGS/Size CTL*...
  • Page 933 3.SP Mode Tables 8-305-005 S:Scan PGS/Size CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-305-006 S:Scan PGS/Size CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-305-007 S:Scan PGS/Size CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-305-008 S:Scan PGS/Size CTL*...
  • Page 934 3.SP Mode Tables 8-326-003 L:Sacn Poster 9 Sheet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-381-001 T:Total PrtPGS Field Number CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-382-001 C:Total PrtPGS Field Number CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-383-001 F:Total PrtPGS Field Number...
  • Page 935 3.SP Mode Tables 8-421-022 T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 8in1 + Magazine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-421-023 T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 9in1 + Magazine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-421-024 T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 16in1 + Magazine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-422-001...
  • Page 936 3.SP Mode Tables 8-424-006 P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-424-007 P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 4in1 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-424-008 P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 6in1 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-424-009 P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 8in1...
  • Page 937 3.SP Mode Tables 8-426-001 L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Simplex> Duplex CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-426-004 L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Simplex Combine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-426-005 L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Duplex Combine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-426-006 L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1...
  • Page 938 3.SP Mode Tables 8-427-023 O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 9in1 + Magazine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-427-024 O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 16in1 + Magazine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-431-001 T:PrtPGS/ImgEdt Cover/Slip Sheet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-431-002 T:PrtPGS/ImgEdt...
  • Page 939 3.SP Mode Tables 8-442-010 C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Full Bleed CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-442-254 C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Other (Standard) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-442-255 C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Other (Custom) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-443-001 F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size CTL*...
  • Page 940 3.SP Mode Tables 8-445-255 S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Other (Custom) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-446-001 L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-446-002 L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-446-003 L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size CTL*...
  • Page 941 3.SP Mode Tables 8-451-014 PrtPGS/Ppr Tray Tray 13 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-451-015 PrtPGS/Ppr Tray Tray 14 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-451-016 PrtPGS/Ppr Tray Tray 15 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-451-101 PrtPGS/Ppr Tray LC Inserter...
  • Page 942 3.SP Mode Tables 8-466-002 L:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Recycled CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-466-003 L:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Special CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-466-004 L:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Thick CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-466-005 L:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Normal (Back)
  • Page 943 3.SP Mode Tables 8-496-001 L:PrtPGS/Col Mode CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-496-002 L:PrtPGS/Col Mode Single Color CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-496-003 L:PrtPGS/Col Mode Two Color CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-496-004 L:PrtPGS/Col Mode Full Color...
  • Page 944 3.SP Mode Tables 8-507-005 O:PrtPGS/Col Mode Two Color CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-507-051 O:PrtPGS/Col Mode B/W(Banner) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-507-052 O:PrtPGS/Col Mode Full Color(Banner) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-507-053 O:PrtPGS/Col Mode Single Color(Banner)
  • Page 945 3.SP Mode Tables 8-521-002 T:PrtPGS/FIN Stack CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-521-003 T:PrtPGS/FIN Staple CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-521-004 T:PrtPGS/FIN Booklet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-521-005 T:PrtPGS/FIN Z-Fold...
  • Page 946 3.SP Mode Tables 8-523-008 F:PrtPGS/FIN Inside-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-523-009 F:PrtPGS/FIN Three-IN-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-523-010 F:PrtPGS/FIN Three-OUT-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-523-011 F:PrtPGS/FIN Four-Fold...
  • Page 947 3.SP Mode Tables 8-525-014 S:PrtPGS/FIN Ring-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-525-015 S:PrtPGS/FIN 3rd Vendor CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-525-016 S:PrtPGS/FIN TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-526-001 L:PrtPGS/FIN Sort...

  • Page 948: Sp8-Xxx (Data Log2) -2

    3.SP Mode Tables SP Tables - SP8-XXX (2) SP8-XXX (Data Log2) -2 SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step] 8-561- T:A Sheet Of Paper Total: Over A3/DLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-561- T:A Sheet Of Paper Total: Under A3/DLT...
  • Page 949 3.SP Mode Tables 8-566- L:A Sheet Of Paper Total: Under A3/DLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-566- L:A Sheet Of Paper Duplex: Over A3/DLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-566- L:A Sheet Of Paper Duplex: Under A3/DLT CTL*...
  • Page 950 3.SP Mode Tables 8-581- T:Counter Full Color: B4 JIS or CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] Smaller 8-581- T:Counter Full Color Print CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-581- T:Counter Mono Color Print CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-581-...
  • Page 951 3.SP Mode Tables 8-583- F:Counter Single Color CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-584- P:Counter CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-584- P:Counter Mono Color CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-584- P:Counter Full Color...
  • Page 952 3.SP Mode Tables 8-601- T:Coverage Counter Coverage Counter 3 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-601- Coverage Counter Coverage Counter 1 (YMC) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-601- Coverage Counter Coverage Counter 2 (YMC) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-601- Coverage Counter...
  • Page 953 3.SP Mode Tables 8-617- SDK Apli Counter SDK-2 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-617- SDK Apli Counter SDK-3 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-617- SDK Apli Counter SDK-4 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-617- SDK Apli Counter SDK-5...
  • Page 954 3.SP Mode Tables 8-621- Func Use Counter Function-009 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-621- Func Use Counter Function-010 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-621- Func Use Counter Function-011 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-621- Func Use Counter Function-012...
  • Page 955 3.SP Mode Tables 8-621- Func Use Counter Function-028 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-621- Func Use Counter Function-029 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-621- Func Use Counter Function-030 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-621- Func Use Counter Function-031...
  • Page 956 3.SP Mode Tables 8-621- Func Use Counter Function-047 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-621- Func Use Counter Function-048 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-621- Func Use Counter Function-049 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-621- Func Use Counter Function-050...
  • Page 957 3.SP Mode Tables 8-631- T:FAX TX PGS Color(Tel) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-631- T:FAX TX PGS B/W(Cloud) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-631- T:FAX TX PGS Color(Cloud) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-633- F:FAX TX PGS B/W(Tel)
  • Page 958 3.SP Mode Tables 8-671- T:Deliv PGS/PC CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-671- T:Deliv PGS/PC Color CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-675- S:Deliv PGS/PC CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-675- S:Deliv PGS/PC Color...
  • Page 959 3.SP Mode Tables 8-711- T:Scan PGS/Comp CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-711- T:Scan PGS/Comp Other CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-711- T:Scan PGS/Comp PDF/Comp CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-711- T:Scan PGS/Comp PDF/A...
  • Page 960 3.SP Mode Tables PGS/WSD/DSM 8-725- S:Deliv Color CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] PGS/WSD/DSM 8-731- T:Scan PGS/Media CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-731- T:Scan PGS/Media Color CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-735- S:Scan PGS/Media CTL*...
  • Page 961 3.SP Mode Tables 8-791- LS Memory Remain CTL* [ 0 to 100 / 0 / 1% ] 8-801- Toner Remain CTL* [ 0 to 100 / 0 / 1% ] 8-801- Toner Remain CTL* [ 0 to 100 / 0 / 1% ] 8-801- Toner Remain CTL*...
  • Page 962 3.SP Mode Tables 8-811- Eco Counter Sync Combine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-811- Eco Counter Sync Color(%) CTL* [ 0 to 100 / 0 / 1% ] 8-811- Eco Counter Sync Full Color(%) CTL* [ 0 to 100 / 0 / 1% ] 8-811- Eco Counter...
  • Page 963 3.SP Mode Tables 8-811- Eco Counter Sync Duplex:Last CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-811- Eco Counter Sync Combine:Last CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-811- Eco Counter Sync Color(%):Last CTL* [ 0 to 100 / 0 / 1% ] 8-811- Eco Counter Sync Full Color(%):Last...
  • Page 964 3.SP Mode Tables 8-851- Cvr Cnt:0-10% 8~10%:BK CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-851- Cvr Cnt:0-10% 8~10%:Y CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-851- Cvr Cnt:0-10% 8~10%:M CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-851- Cvr Cnt:0-10% 8~10%:C...
  • Page 965 3.SP Mode Tables 8-891- Page/Toner Bottle CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-901- Page/Toner_Prev1 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-901- Page/Toner_Prev1 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-901- Page/Toner_Prev1 CTL*...
  • Page 966 3.SP Mode Tables 8-941- Machine Status Energy Save Time CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-941- Machine Status Low Power Time CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-941- Machine Status Off Mode Time CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-941-...
  • Page 967 3.SP Mode Tables 8-961- Electricity Status Main Power Off Time CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-961- Electricity Status Reading and Printing Time CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-961- Electricity Status Printing Time CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]...
  • Page 968 3.SP Mode Tables 8-999- Admin. Counter List Printer: BW CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-999- Admin. Counter List Printer: Single Color CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] 8-999- Admin. Counter List Printer: Two Color CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]...
  • Page 969 3.SP Mode Tables 8-999- Admin. Counter List Scanner Transmission: CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ] Color 8-999- Admin. Counter List Scanner Transmission: BW CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]...

  • Page 970: Printer Service Mode

    3.SP Mode Tables Printer Service Mode 1001 Bit Switch Bit Switch 1 Responding with the hostname as the Model name (PnP name) Hostname sysName This BitSwitch can change the value of the sysName. 0 (default): Model name (PnP name) such as "MP C401SP" 1: Host name No I/O Timeout Disabled...
  • Page 971 3.SP Mode Tables 1001 Bit Switch [PCL5e/c.PS]: PDL Auto Switching Enable Disable Enables/disable the MFPs ability to change the PDL processor mid-job. Some host systems submit jobs that contain both PS and PCL5e/c. If Auto PDL switching is disabled, these jobs will not be printed properly. Color balance switching Disabled Enabled...
  • Page 972 3.SP Mode Tables 1001 Bit Switch User Tools > Printer Features > System Multiple copies if a paper size or type mismatch Disabled (Single Enabled (Multiple occurs copy) copy) If a paper size or type mismatch occurs during the printing of multiple copies, only a single copy is output by default.
  • Page 973 3.SP Mode Tables 1001 Bit Switch bit 0 Forced printing Disabled Enabled If enabled, the image will be printed regardless of whether the specified roller is of the correct size paper or not. This is similar to "Form Feed" on a standard printer. The default is disabled. bit 1 to 7 1001...
  • Page 974 3.SP Mode Tables 1001 Bit Switch Job Cancel Disabled (Not Enabled cancelled) (Cancelled) Enable: All jobs will be cancelled after a jam occurs. Note: If this bit switch is enabled, printing under the following conditions might result in problems: - Job submission via USB or parallel port - Spool printing (WIM >...
  • Page 975 3.SP Mode Tables 1001 Bit Switch Disabled (=1): Print from USB/SD will not have the Preview function. 1001 Bit Switch Bit Switch A bit 0 to 3 bit 4 Not Used Store and Skip Errored Job locks the queue bit 5 Queue is not Queue locked locked after SSEJ...
  • Page 976 3.SP Mode Tables 1001 Bit Switch the Tray Setting Priority setting of the Bypass Tray, this BitSwitch can switch the behavior whether or not Limitless Paper Feeding is applied to the Bypass Tray.* The default is Enabled (=0). *Limitless Paper Feeding will try a matching tray of the next highest priority if a job specified to Auto Tray Select as the tray setting is submitted and the tray runs out of paper.
  • Page 977 3.SP Mode Tables Rev. 02/01/2017 1001 Bit Switch As of 15S models, the Login User Name can be displayed on the operation panel. The user ID type displayed on the operation panel can be changed by configuring BitSwitch #12-5 as follows: - 0 (Default): Login User Name - 1: User ID.
  • Page 978 3.SP Mode Tables • 05: 1200x600Photo • 06: 600x600Text • 07: 600x600Text 1102- Tone Control Mode Selection [0 to 99 / 0 / 1/step] 1103 [PrnColorSheet] 1103- ToneCtlSheet Prints the test page to check the color balance before and after the gamma adjustment.
  • Page 979 3.SP Mode Tables 1106 [Toner Limit] Adjusts the maximum toner amount for image development. 1106-001 Toner Limit Value [100 to 400 / 0 / 1/step] 1110 [Media Print Device Setting] Enable or disable the media print support function. 0: Disable, 1:Enable 1110-002 0: Disable 1:Enable [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]...

  • Page 980: Scanner Service Mode

    3.SP Mode Tables Scanner Service Mode SP1-XXX (System and Others) 1001 [Scan Nv Version] 1-001- *CTL Operates automatic initialization to ensure that scanner NV is initialized if necessary. To do this SP, specify the version of scanner NV within 9 characters. “Function name”_”Machine code”_”Serial number”...
  • Page 981 3.SP Mode Tables - Subject - Fail name 1013 [Scan to Media Device Setting] 1-013-002 0:OFF 1:ON *CTL [0 or 1 / 1 / - /step] Enable or disable ScanTo media device. 1014 [Scan to Folder Pass Input Set] [ 0 or 1 / 0 / - /step] 1-014-001 0:OFF 1:ON *CTL...

  • Page 982: Sp2-Xxx (Scanning-Image Quality)

    3.SP Mode Tables Panel if IPv4 address is enabled. bit 3 Remote UI Not Used Sets use of Remote UI for scanner function. Function bit 4 Reserved bit 5 Reserved bit 6 Reserved bit 7 Reserved SP2-XXX (Scanning-image Quality) 2021 [Compression Level(Grayscale)] Selects the compression ratio for grayscale processing mode (JPEG) for the five settings that can be selected at the operation panel.
  • Page 983 3.SP Mode Tables 2030 [OCR PDF DetectSens] 2-030-001 White Lumi Value: 0 - 255 *CTL [0 to 255 / 250 / 1 / step] 2-030-002 White Pix Ratio: 0 - 100 *CTL [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 / step] 2-030-003 White Tile Ratio: 0 -100 *CTL...

  • Page 984: Input And Output Check

    3.SP Mode Tables Input and Output Check ADF Unit Input Check Part Name SP Name SP No. Reading Top cover set sensor Feed Cover Sensor 6-011- Close Open Original set sensor Original Detection 6-011- Not set ADF feed sensor DF Feed Sensor 6-011- Paper detected Paper not detected...

  • Page 985: Scanner Unit/ Laser Unit

    3.SP Mode Tables Scanner Unit/ Laser Unit Input Check Part Name SP Name SP No. Reading Scanner HP sensor Scanner HP Sensor 5-803-200 Not HP ADF set sensor Platen Cover Sensor 5-803-201 Close Open Interlock switch 1 Interlock Release Detection 1 5-803-012 Door open Door close...

  • Page 986: Paper Feed

    3.SP Mode Tables Paper Feed Input Check Part Name SP Name SP No. Reading Scanner HP sensor Tray Set Detection 5-803- Not set Bypass paper end Bypass Paper End Detection 5-803- Paper Paper not sensor Sensor detected detected Registration sensor Registration Sensor 5-803- Paper...

  • Page 987: Paper Exit/ Duplex, Waste Toner Bottle

    3.SP Mode Tables Output Check Part Name SP Name Remark Tray lift Tray Lift Do not execute this SP when the paper feed tray is set. motor Motor 804- If keeps the tray lift motor switched ON, the bottom plate can lift up overmuch because the tray lift sensor does not work.
  • Page 988 3.SP Mode Tables Input Check Part Name SP Name SP No. Reading Duplex entrance sensor Duplex Entrance Sensor 5-803- Paper Paper not detected detected Right cover switch Right Cover Sensor 5-803- Door close Door open Paper exit sensor Exit Sensor 5-803- Paper Paper not...

  • Page 989: Fusing

    3.SP Mode Tables Fusing Input Check Part Name SP Name SP No. Reading Fusing entrance Fusing Entrance Sensor 5-803- Paper Paper not sensor detected detected Fusing exit sensor Fusing Exit Sensor 5-803- Paper Paper not detected detected Set and Destination 5-803- Detection Fusing New Unit Detection...

  • Page 990: Toner Supply/ Transfer

    3.SP Mode Tables Toner Supply/ Transfer Input Check Part Name SP Name SP No. Reading Toner end sensor (C) Toner End Sensor: C 5-803-024 Not end Toner end sensor (M) Toner End Sensor: M 5-803-023 Not end Toner end sensor (Y) Toner End Sensor: Y 5-803-022 Not end...
  • Page 991 3.SP Mode Tables Part Name SP Name Remark ITB Contact Image Transfer If you execute this SP, the ITB roller halts at a position Motor Contact Motor 804- which is not at the home position (separated from the ITB). If you remove or install the PCDU or the ITB unit immediately after the motor is switched ON/OFF with this SP, the drums and ITB may be damaged.

  • Page 992: Drive Unit

    3.SP Mode Tables Drive Unit Input Check Part Name SP Name SP No. Reading Fusing motor Fusing Motor: Lock 5-803-041 Lock Normal Paper transport motor Transport Motor: Lock 5-803-042 Lock Normal Development motor (CMY) FC Dev Motor: Lock 5-803-039 Lock Normal Drum motor (CMY) FC Drum Motor: Lock...
  • Page 993 3.SP Mode Tables Part Name SP Name Remark Fusing Motor: Middle Speed 804- Paper transport Transport motor Motor: Std 804- Speed 1 Transport Motor: Low 804- Speed Transport Motor: Standard 804- Speed 2 Transport Motor: Middle 804- Speed Development FC Dev Motor: motor (CMY) Std Speed 1 804-...

  • Page 994: Fan/ Board

    3.SP Mode Tables Part Name SP Name Remark Bk Drum abnormal stop, for example JAM, if the drum motor (K) is Motor: Low 804- turned ON with these SPs, the K drum and ITB drive. At Speed this time, the color drums have stopped but the color drums are in contact with the ITB.
  • Page 995 3.SP Mode Tables Part Name SP Name SP No. Reading PP:T1T2:SC Detection 5-803-045 SC detected No SC PP:CB:SC Detection 5-803-044 SC detected No SC BiCU Version Detection 5-803-056 Key Counter 1: Set Detection 5-803-047 Not set Key Counter 2: Set Detection 5-803-048 Not set Keycard: Set Detection...
  • Page 996 3.SP Mode Tables Part Name SP Name Remark PP:Charge DC:M drum. Therefore the drum may be damaged 804- electrostatically. Note: If you turn ON these SPs multiple at the same time, and PP:Charge DC:C turn OFF one of the SPs, all of the output will be stopped. 804- When you want to stop the outputs, turn OFF all of the SPs turned ON.

  • Page 997: Paper Feed Unit (Optional)

    3.SP Mode Tables Part Name SP Name Remark PP:Charge AC:M 804- PP:Charge AC:C 804- PP:Charge AC:Bk 804- Paper Feed Unit (Optional) Input Check Part Name SP Name SP No. Reading PFU door switch 1 PFU Door Sensor 1 5-803- Close Open PFU door switch 2 PFU Door Sensor 2...

  • Page 998: Bin Tray Unit (Optional)

    3.SP Mode Tables 1 Bin Tray Unit (Optional) Input Check Part Name SP Name SP No. Reading 1-bin tray exit sensor 1-Bin:Exit Sensor 5-803- Paper Paper not detected detected 1-bin tray paper remaining 1-Bin:Paper Remaining 5-803- Paper Paper not sensor Sensor detected detected...

  • Page 999: Software Configuration

    4.Software Configuration 4. Software Configuration Rev. 02/01/2017 Management Features to Disable the Document Server Function 1. Enter 'Copy' SP mode. 2. Change SP5-967-001 to 1. (0:ON 1:OFF) 3. Reboot the machine.  When the above SP mode (SP5-967-001) is OFF (=1), both the Document Server and Locked Print functions will be disabled.

  • Page 1000: Printing Features

    4.Software Configuration Printing Features Behavior of USB Printer Detection An MFP connected via USB sends its product name and unique serial number. With the data, the machine determines whether requires a printer driver for the USB device to be installed. SP5-844-005 allows you to change how to determine the MFP requires a printer driver installation: •...
  • Page 1001 4.Software Configuration triggers. PCL interpreter: It can detect PS triggers in PCL data. If a PS trigger is detected, the PCL interpreter will abort processing and return the unprocessed part of the job back to the printer system. Up to 256 bytes from the start of each page can be searched for triggers.
  • Page 1002 4.Software Configuration PDL selection (PCL5 or PS (including PDF)) at the beginning of the job: performed by the printer system PDL switching from PCL5 to PS: performed by the PCL interpreter and the printer system PDL switching from PS to PCL5: performed by the PS interpreter and the printer system Triggers Printer system PCL5 triggers...

This manual is also suitable for:

Mp c407D296D297D298D299

Table of Contents